Sony TRV25TRV27 User Manual

3-073-855-12 (1)  
Dig it a l  
Vid e o Ca m e ra  
Re co rd e r  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,  
and retain it for future reference.  
Owners Record  
The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the  
serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers  
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.  
Model No. DCR-TRV  
Model No. AC-  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
TM  
SERIES  
DCR-TRV27  
DCR-TRV16/TRV18/  
TRV25/TRV27  
©2002 Sony Corporation  
Fo r cu st o m e rs in CANADA  
De cla ra t io n o f Co n fo rm it y  
Trade Name:  
Model No.:  
SONY  
Me m o ry St ick”  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
DCR-TRV25, DCR-  
TRV27  
Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc.  
Address:  
680 Kinderkamack Road,  
Oradell, NJ07649 U.S.A.  
Telephone No.: 201-930-6972  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions.: (1) This device  
may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2)this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Me m o ry St ick”  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,  
and (2) this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
CAUTION  
You are cautioned that any changes or  
modifications not expressly approved in this  
manual could void your authority to operate  
this equipment.  
No t e :  
This equipment has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
— Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/  
TV technician for help.  
3
Ma in Fe a t u re s  
• Recording moving pictures on a  
tape (p. 26)  
• Recording still images on a tape  
(p. 46)  
Re co rd in g m o vin g  
p ict u re s o r st ill im a g e s,  
a n d p la yin g t h e m b a ck  
• Playing back a tape (p. 38)  
• Recording still images on  
a “Memory Stick”* (p. 43, 112)  
• Recording moving pictures on  
a “Memory Stick”* (p. 125)  
• Viewing still images recorded on  
a “Memory Stick”* (p. 137)  
• Viewing moving pictures on  
a “Memory Stick”* (p. 140)  
• Viewing images recorded on a  
“Memory Stick” using the USB cable*  
(p. 169, 173)  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s o n  
yo u r co m p u t e r  
• Viewing images recorded on a tape  
using the USB cable (p. 165)  
• Capturing images on your computer  
from your camcorder using the USB  
cable (p. 166)  
• Converting an analog signal into  
digital to capture images onto your  
computer (p. 174)  
4
Ma in Fe a t u re s  
Ot h e r u se s  
Functions for adjusting exposure in the recording mode  
• BACK LIGHT (p. 33)  
NightShot/ Super NightShot/ Color Slow Shutter (p. 34)  
• PROGRAM AE (p. 58)  
• Adjusting the exposure manually (p. 60)  
Functions for giving images more impact  
• Digital zoom (p. 30)  
The default setting is OFF. (To zoom greater than 10×,  
select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu settings.)  
• Fader (p. 51)  
• Picture effect (p. 54)  
• Digital effect (p. 55)  
• Titles (p. 98)  
• MEMORY MIX* (p. 120)  
Functions for giving a natural appearance to your recordings  
• Landscape (p. 58)  
• Sports lesson (p. 58)  
• Manual focus (p. 61)  
Functions for using after recording  
• END SEARCH/ EDITSEARCH/ Rec Review (p. 37)  
• DATA CODE (p. 39)  
• Tape PB ZOOM (p. 67)/ Memory PB ZOOM* (p. 145)  
• ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 69)  
• TITLE SEARCH (p. 70)  
• Digital program editing (p. 78, 132*)  
* Except DCR-TRV16  
5
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
Using special effects – Digital effect ... 55  
Using the PROGRAM AE function .... 58  
Adjusting the exposure manually ...... 60  
Focusing manually ................................ 61  
Interval recording ................................. 62  
Frame by frame recording  
Ma in Fe a t u re s ...................................... 4  
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e  
– Recording on a tape ............................. 8  
– Recording on a “Memory Stick”  
(except DCR-TRV16) ...................... 10  
– Frame recording .......................... 64  
Ge t t in g St a rt e d  
Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck  
Op e ra t io n s  
Using this manual ................................. 12  
Checking supplied accessories ............ 15  
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ... 16  
Installing the battery pack ............. 16  
Charging the battery pack ............. 17  
Connecting to a wall outlet ........... 22  
Step 2 Setting the date and time ........ 23  
Step 3 Inserting a cassette ................... 25  
Playing back tapes with picture effect  
........................................................... 65  
Playing back tapes with digital effect  
........................................................... 66  
Enlarging images recorded on a tape  
– Tape PB ZOOM ........................... 67  
Quickly locating a scene  
– ZERO SET MEMORY ................. 69  
Searching the boundaries of recorded  
tape by title – TITLE SEARCH ..... 70  
Searching a recording by date  
– DATE SEARCH ........................... 71  
Searching for a photo – PHOTO  
Re co rd in g – Ba sics  
Recording a picture ............................... 26  
Shooting backlit subjects  
– BACK LIGHT ........................ 33  
Shooting in the dark  
NightShot/ Super NightShot/  
Color Slow Shutter .................. 34  
Self-timer recording  
SEARCH/ PHOTO SCAN ............. 73  
Ed it in g  
(except DCR-TRV16) ............... 36  
Checking recordings  
Dubbing a tape ...................................... 75  
Dubbing only desired scenes  
– END SEARCH/ EDITSEARCH/  
Rec Review ...................................... 37  
– Digital program editing  
(on tapes) ......................................... 78  
Recording video or TV programs ....... 89  
Inserting a scene from a VCR  
– Insert Editing ............................... 92  
Audio dubbing ...................................... 94  
Superimposing a title ........................... 98  
Making your own titles ...................... 101  
Labeling a cassette .............................. 103  
Pla yb a ck – Ba sics  
Playing back a tape ............................... 38  
To display the screen indicators  
– Display function ................... 39  
Viewing the recording on TV .............. 42  
Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g  
Op e ra t io n s  
Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s  
(e xce p t DCR-TRV16)  
Recording still images on a “Memory  
Stick” during recording on a tape  
(except DCR-TRV16) ...................... 43  
Recording still images on a tape  
– Tape Photo recording ................. 46  
Adjusting the white balance manually  
........................................................... 48  
Using the wide mode ........................... 49  
Using the fader function ...................... 51  
Using special effects  
Using a “Memory Stick”  
– Introduction ............................... 105  
Recording still images on a “Memory  
Stick”  
– Memory Photo recording ......... 112  
Recording an image from a tape as a  
still image ...................................... 117  
Superimposing a still image in the  
“Memory Stick” on an image  
– MEMORY MIX .......................... 120  
– Picture effect ................................. 54  
6
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
Recording moving pictures on a  
“Memory Stick”  
Viewing images recorded on a  
“Memory Stick” with your  
computer  
– MPEG movie recording ............ 125  
Recording pictures from a tape as a  
moving picture ............................. 128  
Recording edited pictures from a  
tape as a moving picture  
– For Macintosh users  
(except DCR-TRV16) .................... 173  
Capturing images from an analog  
video unit on your computer  
– Signal convert function ............. 174  
– Digital program editing  
(on “Memory Stick”s) .................. 132  
Copying still images from a tape  
– PHOTO SAVE ............................ 135  
Viewing still images  
Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r  
Changing the menu settings .............. 175  
– Memory Photo playback .......... 137  
Viewing moving pictures  
– MPEG movie playback ............. 140  
Copying images recorded on  
“Memory Stick”s to a tape .......... 143  
Enlarging still images recorded on a  
“Memory Stick”  
Tro u b le sh o o t in g  
Types of trouble and how to correct  
trouble ............................................ 185  
Self-diagnosis display ......................... 191  
Warning indicators and messages .... 192  
Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n  
– Memory PB ZOOM ................... 145  
Playing back images in a continuous  
loop – SLIDE SHOW .................... 147  
Preventing accidental erasure  
– Image protection ........................ 148  
Deleting images – DELETE ............... 149  
Writing a print mark  
Usable cassettes ................................... 194  
About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery  
pack ................................................ 197  
About i.LINK ....................................... 199  
Using your camcorder abroad .......... 201  
Maintenance information and  
precautions .................................... 202  
Specifications ....................................... 207  
– PRINT MARK ............................ 151  
Using the optional printer ................. 152  
Qu ick Re fe re n ce  
Vie w in g Im a g e s Usin g Yo u r  
Co m p u t e r  
Identifying parts and controls ........... 209  
Index ..................................................... 219  
Viewing images with your computer  
– Introduction ............................... 154  
Connecting your camcorder to your  
computer using the USB cable  
– For Windows users ................... 157  
Viewing images recorded on a tape  
with your computer  
– For Windows users ................... 165  
Viewing images recorded on a  
“Memory Stick” with your  
computer  
– For Windows users  
(except DCR-TRV16) .................... 169  
Connecting your camcorder to your  
computer using the USB cable  
– For Macintosh users  
(except DCR-TRV16) .................... 171  
7
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a t a p e  
This chapter introduces you to the basic features to record on a  
tape of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses “( )” for  
more information.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 22)  
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 16).  
Open the DC IN  
jack cover.  
Connect the plug with its v  
mark facing up.  
AC power adaptor (supplied)  
In se rt in g a ca sse t t e (p . 25)  
1Slide  
OPEN/  
2Push the center of the  
cassette back to insert  
the cassette.  
3Close the cassette  
EJECT in the direction  
of the arrow and open  
the lid.  
compartment by  
pressing  
on the  
Insert the cassette  
straight as far as  
possible into the  
cassette compartment  
with the window  
facing up.  
cassette  
compartment.  
After the cassette  
compartment goes  
down completely,  
close the lid until it  
clicks.  
8
Re co rd in g a p ict u re (p . 26)  
1Remove the lens cap.  
2Set the POWER switch  
to CAMERA while  
pressing the small  
green button.  
3Open the LCD  
panel while  
pressing  
VCR  
OPEN. The  
picture  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
appears on the  
screen.  
4Press START/ STOP.  
Your camcorder starts  
recording. To stop  
recording, press  
View finder  
When the LCD panel is closed, use the viewfinder  
with your eye against the eyecup.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight (p. 29).  
START/ STOP again.  
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record the date  
and time for a picture, set the clock before recording (p. 23).  
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck p ict u re o n t h e LCD  
scre e n (p . 38)  
1Set the POWER  
switch to VCR while  
pressing the small  
green button.  
2Press m to rewind the tape.  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
REW  
3Press N to start playback.  
PLAY  
NOTE  
Do not pick up your camcorder by  
holding the viewfinder, the LCD  
panel, or the battery pack.  
9
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
– Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
This chapter introduces you to the basic features to record on a  
“Memory Stick” of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses  
“( )” for more information.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 22)  
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 16).  
Open the DC IN  
jack cover.  
Connect the plug with its v  
mark facing up.  
AC power adaptor (supplied)  
In se rt in g a “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 106)  
Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the B mark  
facing up as illustrated.  
B mark  
“Memory Stick” slot  
When ejecting the “Memory  
Stick”, press the “Memory  
Stick” once lightly.  
10  
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 112)  
2Set the POWER switch to  
MEMORY while pressing  
the small green button.  
Make sure that the LOCK  
switch is set to the left  
(unlock) position.  
1Remove the lens cap.  
3Open the LCD  
panel while  
pressing OPEN.  
The picture  
LOCK switch  
appears on the  
screen.  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
4Press PHOTO  
lightly.  
5Press PHOTO  
View finder  
deeper.  
When the LCD panel is closed, use the  
viewfinder with your eye against the eyecup.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight  
(p. 29).  
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record the date  
and time for a picture, set the clock before recording (p. 23).  
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck st ill im a g e s o n t h e LCD  
scre e n (p . 137)  
1Set the POWER  
VCR  
switch to  
OFF(CHG)  
MEMORY or VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
while pressing the  
small green button.  
2Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded  
image is displayed.  
PLAY  
Press MEMORY –/ + to select the desired  
image.  
NOTE  
Do not pick up your camcorder by  
holding the viewfinder, the LCD  
panel or the battery pack.  
11  
— Ge t t in g St a rt e d —  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
The instructions in this manual are for the four models listed in the table below. Before  
you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model number  
by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-TRV27 is the model used for  
illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the illustrations. Any  
differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example, “DCR-TRV27  
only”.  
As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in  
capital letters.  
e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep to indicate that the operation is  
being carried out.  
Types of differences  
DCR-  
TRV16  
TRV18  
TRV25  
TRV27  
1)  
MEMORY mark*  
(on the POWER  
switch)  
z
z
z
Intelligent  
accessory shoe  
2)  
2)  
2)  
8 pin  
15 pin*  
15 pin*  
15 pin*  
LCD screen  
6.2 cm (2.5 type) 6.2 cm (2.5 type) 6.2 cm (2.5 type) 8.8 cm (3.5 type)  
z Provided  
Not provided  
1)  
*
The model with MEMORY marked on the POWER switch is provided with memory functions.  
See page 105 for details.  
This intelligent accessory shoe is designed to use a printer (optional) (p. 152).  
2)  
*
12  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
No t e o n Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can use only mini DV cassettes with  
your camcorder. We recommend that you use a tape with cassette memory  
.
Functions that require different operations depending on whether or not the tape has a  
cassette memory are:  
– END SEARCH (p. 37)  
– DATE SEARCH (p. 71)  
– PHOTO SEARCH (p. 73)  
Functions that you can operate only with the cassette memory are:  
– TITLE SEARCH (p. 70)  
– Superimposing a title (p. 98)  
– Labeling a cassette (p. 103)  
For details of cassette types, see page 194.  
You see this mark in the introduction of features that are operated only with  
cassette memory.  
Cassettes with cassette memory are marked by  
(Cassette Memory).  
No t e o n TV co lo r syst e m s  
TV color systems differ depending on the country or region. To view your recordings  
on a TV, you need an NTSC system-based TV.  
Co p yrig h t p re ca u t io n s  
Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted.  
Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to copyright laws.  
13  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
Pre ca u t io n s o n ca m co rd e r ca re  
Le n s a n d LCD scre e n /fin d e r (o n m o u n t e d m o d e ls o n ly)  
The LCD screen and the finder are manufactured using extremely high-precision  
technology, so over 99.99 % of the pixels are operational for effective use.  
How ever, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (w hite, red,  
blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder.  
These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the  
recording in any w ay.  
• Do not let your camcorder become wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea  
water. Letting your camcorder become wet may cause your camcorder to  
malfunction. Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a ].  
Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60 °C (140 °F), such as in  
a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b ].  
• Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD  
screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause  
malfunctions [c].  
• Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
Take pictures of the sun in low light conditions such as dusk [d ].  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
14  
Ch e ckin g su p p lie d a cce sso rie s  
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.  
1
4
8
2
3
5
6
0
7
9
1 Wireless Remote Commander (1)  
5 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 42)  
6 Shoulder strap (1) (p. 213)  
7 Lens cap (1) (p. 26)  
(p. 216)  
2 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC pow er  
adaptor (1), Pow er cord (1) (p. 22)  
8 “Memory Stick” (1) (p. 105)  
3 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote  
(except DCR-TRV16)  
Commander (2) (p. 216)  
9 USB cable (1) (p. 154)  
4 Battery pack (1) (p. 16, 17)  
NP-FM30: DCR-TRV16/ TRV18  
NP-FM50: DCR-TRV25/ TRV27  
0 CD-ROM (SPVD-008 USB Driver) (1)  
(p. 159)  
Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a  
malfunction of the camcorder, storage media, etc.  
15  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
In st a llin g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.  
(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks.  
1
2
To re m o ve t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.  
(2) Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT  
down.  
1
2
BATT release  
button  
2
If you use the large capacity battery pack  
If you install the NP-FM70/ QM71/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91 battery pack on your camcorder,  
extend its viewfinder.  
16  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder.  
Your camcorder operates only with the InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (M series).  
See page 197 for details of InfoLITHIUMbattery pack.  
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover. Connect the AC power adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the plugs v mark  
facing up.  
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.  
(3) Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.  
(4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins. The remaining battery  
time is indicated in minutes on the display window.  
When the remaining battery indicator changes to  
, normal charge is completed. To  
fully charge the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about one hour  
after normal charge is completed until FULL appears in the display window. Fully  
charging the battery allows you to use the battery longer than usual.  
1
4
2
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
The number in the illustration of the display window may differ from that on your  
camcorder.  
Aft e r ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.  
Note  
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of  
the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power  
adaptor.  
17  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Remaining battery time indicator  
The remaining battery time indicator in the display window indicates the approximate  
recording time when recording using the viewfinder.  
Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time  
“– – – – minappears in the display window.  
When you use the AC pow er adaptor  
Place the AC power adaptor near a wall outlet.  
While using the AC power adaptor, if any trouble occurs with this unit, disconnect the  
plug from the wall outlet as soon as possible to cut off the power.  
Ch a rg in g t im e  
Battery pack  
Full charge (Normal charge)  
145 (85)  
1)  
NP-FM30*  
2)  
NP-FM50*  
150 (90)  
NP-FM70  
240 (180)  
NP-QM71  
260 (200)  
NP-FM90  
330 (270)  
NP-FM91/ QM91  
360 (300)  
Approximate minutes at 25°C (77°F) to charge an empty battery pack.  
The charging time may increase if the batterys temperature is extremely high or low  
because of the ambient temperature.  
1)  
*
DCR-TRV16/ TRV18 supplied  
DCR-TRV25/ TRV27 supplied  
2)  
*
18  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Re co rd in g t im e  
DCR-TRV16/TRV18  
Recording w ith  
the view finder  
Recording w ith  
the LCD screen  
Battery pack  
Continuous  
Typical*  
65  
Continuous  
Typical*  
45  
NP-FM30 (supplied)  
NP-FM50  
125  
200  
415  
485  
630  
725  
90  
105  
150  
310  
365  
475  
550  
75  
NP-FM70  
220  
165  
NP-QM71  
255  
190  
NP-FM90  
340  
255  
NP-FM91/ QM91  
390  
290  
DCR-TRV25  
Battery pack  
Recording w ith  
the view finder  
Recording w ith  
the LCD screen  
Continuous  
Typical*  
75  
Continuous  
Typical*  
60  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
145  
305  
355  
460  
535  
115  
245  
285  
370  
430  
170  
135  
NP-QM71  
195  
160  
NP-FM90  
255  
210  
NP-FM91/ QM91  
295  
240  
DCR-TRV27  
Battery pack  
Recording w ith  
the view finder  
Recording w ith  
the LCD screen  
Continuous  
Typical*  
75  
Continuous  
Typical*  
55  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
145  
305  
355  
460  
535  
105  
220  
255  
340  
390  
170  
125  
NP-QM71  
195  
140  
NP-FM90  
255  
190  
NP-FM91/ QM91  
295  
220  
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery  
* Approximate number of minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/  
stop, zooming and turning the power on/ off. The actual battery life may be shorter.  
19  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Pla yin g t im e  
DCR-TRV16/TRV18  
Playing time  
Battery pack  
Playing time  
w ith LCD closed  
on LCD screen  
NP-FM30 (supplied)  
NP-FM50  
100  
160  
335  
390  
505  
585  
135  
220  
450  
530  
685  
785  
NP-FM70  
NP-QM71  
NP-FM90  
NP-FM91/ QM91  
DCR-TRV25  
Battery pack  
Playing time  
on LCD screen  
Playing time  
w ith LCD closed  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
150  
310  
365  
475  
550  
200  
415  
485  
630  
725  
NP-QM71  
NP-FM90  
NP-FM91/ QM91  
DCR-TRV27  
Battery pack  
Playing time  
on LCD screen  
Playing time  
w ith LCD closed  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
135  
275  
325  
425  
490  
200  
415  
485  
630  
725  
NP-QM71  
NP-FM90  
NP-FM91/ QM91  
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery  
20  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Note  
Approximate recording time and continuous playing time at 25 °C (77 °F). The battery  
life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.  
If the pow er goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that  
the battery pack has enough pow er to operate  
Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the remaining battery time  
indicator is correct.  
Recommended charging temperature  
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C  
to 30 °C (50 °F to 86 °F).  
What is InfoLITHIUM?  
The InfoLITHIUMis a lithium ion battery pack that can exchange data such as  
battery consumption with compatible electronic equipment. This unit is compatible  
with the InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (M series). Your camcorder operates only with  
the InfoLITHIUMbattery. InfoLITHIUMM series battery packs have the  
mark.  
TM  
SERIES  
InfoLITHIUMis a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
21  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Co n n e ct in g t o a w a ll o u t le t  
When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from a  
wall outlet using the AC power adaptor.  
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover. Connect the AC power adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the plugs v mark  
facing up.  
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.  
(3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.  
2, 3  
1
PRECAUTION  
The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (wall outlet) as long as it is  
connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off.  
Notes  
The AC power adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your  
camcorder.  
The DC IN jack has source priority.This means that the battery pack cannot supply  
any power if the AC power adaptor is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the  
power cord is not plugged into a wall outlet.  
Using a car battery  
Use a Sony Car Battery Adaptor (optional). Refer to the operating instructions of the  
Car Battery Adaptor for further information.  
22  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
Set the date and time when you use your camcorder for the first time. CLOCK SET”  
will be displayed each time that you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY  
(except DCR-TRV16) unless you set the date and time.  
If you do not use your camcorder for about four months, the date and time settings  
may be cleared from memory (bars may appear) because the built-in rechargeable  
battery in your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 203).  
Set the year, then the month, the day, the hour and then the minute, in that order.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16), then  
press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
, then press the dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the desired year, then press the dial.  
(5) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and  
pressing the dial.  
(6) Set the minute by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by  
the time signal. The clock starts to move.  
(7) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
1,  
7
MENU  
2
3
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
– – : – – : – –  
2002 JAN  
1
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
12 00 AM  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
4
6
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM 5:30:00 PM  
LTR SIZE  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
JUL 4 2002  
2002 JUL  
4
2002 JAN  
1
2002 JAN  
1
5
30 PM  
12 00 AM  
12 00 AM  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
23  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
The year changes as follow s:  
1995 T · · · · t 2002 T · · · · t 2079  
If you do not set the date and time  
“– – – – – – – – –” and “– –:– –:– –” are recorded on the data code of the tape and the  
Memory Stick(except DCR-TRV16).  
Note on the time indicator  
The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle.  
12:00 AM stands for midnight.  
12:00 PM stands for noon.  
24  
St e p 3 In se rt in g a ca sse t t e  
(1) Prepare the power supply.  
(2) Slide  
OPEN/ EJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid. The  
cassette compartment automatically lifts up and opens.  
(3) Push the center of the cassette back to insert the cassette.  
Insert the cassette straight as far as possible into the cassette compartment with  
the window facing up.  
(4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing  
on the cassette compartment.  
The cassette compartment automatically goes down.  
(5) After the cassette compartment going down completely, close the lid until it  
clicks.  
2
3, 4  
5
OPEN/ EJECT  
To e je ct a ca sse t t e  
Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step 3.  
Notes  
Do not press the cassette compartment down forcibly. Doing so may cause a  
malfunction.  
The cassette compartment may not be closed when you press any part of the cassette  
compartment other than the  
mark.  
When you use a cassette w ith cassette memory  
Read the instruction about cassette memory to use this function properly (p. 194).  
To prevent accidental erasure  
Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to expose the red mark.  
When ejecting a cassette  
Do not press EDITSEARCH.  
25  
Re co rd in g Ba sics —  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.  
(1) Remove the lens cap by pressing both knobs on its sides and pull the lens cap  
string to fix it.  
(2) Prepare the power supply and insert a cassette. See Step 1to Step 3for  
more information (p. 16 to p. 25).  
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button.  
This sets your camcorder to the standby mode.  
(4) To open the LCD panel, press OPEN. The viewfinder automatically turns off.  
(5) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The REC indicator  
appears. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder  
lights up. To stop recording, press START/ STOP again.  
LOCK sw itch  
1
3
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
4
5
REC 0:00:01  
50min  
Camera recording  
lamp  
2
Microphone  
Notes  
Fasten the grip strap firmly.  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed  
while recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto tape. To display the  
recording data, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback  
(p. 39).  
Note on recording mode  
Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP (standard play) mode and in the LP  
(long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings (p. 182). In the LP mode, you can  
record 1.5 times as long as in the SP mode.  
When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing  
back the tape on your camcorder.  
26  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Note on the LOCK sw itch (except DCR-TRV16)  
When you slide the LOCK switch to the right, the POWER switch can no longer be set  
to MEMORY accidentally. LOCK switch is set to the left as the default setting.  
To enable smooth transition  
Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as  
you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder.  
However, check the following:  
Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and in the LP mode on one tape.  
When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
When you use a cassette with cassette memory, however, you can make the transition  
smooth even after ejecting the cassette if you use the END SEARCH function (p. 37).  
If you leave your camcorder in the standby mode for five minutes w hile the  
cassette is inserted  
Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent  
battery and tape wear. To return to the standby mode, set the POWER switch to OFF  
(CHG) and then back to CAMERA. To start recording, press the START/ STOP button  
again without switching the POWER switch. However, your camcorder does not turn  
off automatically while the cassette is not inserted.  
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record in the LP  
mode  
The transition between scenes may not be smooth.  
The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly  
between scenes.  
The battery use time w hen you record using the LCD screen  
The battery time is slightly shorter than the shooting time using the viewfinder.  
Aft e r re co rd in g  
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
(2) Close the LCD panel.  
(3) Eject the cassette.  
(4) Remove the battery pack.  
27  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n  
The LCD panel can be opened up to 90 degrees.  
The LCD panel moves about 90 degrees to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to  
the lens side.  
180°  
90°  
When closing the LCD panel, set it vertically until it clicks, and swing it into the  
camcorder body.  
Note  
The viewfinder automatically turns off when using the LCD screen except in the mirror  
mode (p. 31).  
When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight  
The LCD screen may be difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the  
viewfinder.  
When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel  
Make sure if the LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees.  
28  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Ad ju st in g t h e b rig h t n e ss o f t h e LCD scre e n  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16).  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select LCD BRIGHT in  
settings (p. 178), then press the dial.  
in the menu  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen with  
LCD BRIGHT, then press the dial.  
(3) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
2
LCD/VF SET  
LCD BRIGHT  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
LCD screen backlight  
You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings  
when using the battery pack (p. 178).  
Ad ju st in g t h e vie w fin d e r  
If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the image in the viewfinder come  
into sharp focus.  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16).  
Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.  
The view finder lens adjustment lever  
View finder backlight  
You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select VF B.L. in the menu settings  
when using the battery pack (p. 178).  
29  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Usin g t h e zo o m fe a t u re  
Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom.  
Using the zoom function sparingly results in better-looking recordings.  
W: For wide-angle (subject appears farther away)  
T : For telephoto (subject appears closer)  
W
W
T
T
T
W
To use zoom greater than 10×  
Zoom greater than 10× is performed digitally. Digital zoom can be set to 20 × or 120 ×.  
To activate digital zoom, select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu  
settings (p. 177). The digital zoom function is set to OFF as a default setting.  
The right side of the bar shows  
the digital zooming zone.  
W
T
The digital zooming zone appears  
when you select the digital zoom  
power in the menu settings.  
When you shoot close to a subject  
If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power zoom lever to the Wside until the  
focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/ 8 inch)  
away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/ 2 inch)  
away in the wide-angle position.  
Note on digital zoom  
The picture quality deteriorates as you move the power zoom lever towards the T”  
side.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16)  
You cannot use the digital zoom.  
30  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g w it h t h e Mirro r Mo d e  
This feature allows the camera subject to view him-or herself on the LCD screen.  
The subject uses this feature to check his or her own image on the LCD screen while you  
look at the subject in the viewfinder.  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16).  
Rotate the LCD screen 180 degrees.  
The  
indicator appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen.  
Xz appears in the standby mode, and z appears in the recording mode. Some of other  
indicators appear mirror-reversed and others are not displayed.  
Picture in the mirror mode  
The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the picture will be normal  
when recorded.  
During recording in the mirror mode  
ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander does not work.  
31  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
In d ica t o rs d isp la ye d in t h e re co rd in g m o d e  
Indicators are not recorded on tapes.  
Remaining battery time  
Cassette memory  
This appears when using a cassette with cassette memory.  
Recording mode  
STBY/REC  
REC 0:00:01  
45min  
50min  
Time code/Tape counter  
Remaining tape  
This appears after you insert a cassette and record or  
play back for a while.  
JUL  
4
2002  
12:05:56 AM  
Time  
The time is displayed about five seconds after the  
power is turned on.  
Date  
The date is displayed about five seconds after the  
power is turned on.  
Remaining battery time indicator during recording  
The indicator shows the approximate continuous recording time. The indicator may not  
be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are recording. When you close the  
LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct remaining  
battery time in minutes to be displayed.  
Time code  
The time code indicates the recording or playback time, 0:00:00(hours : minutes :  
seconds) in CAMERA and 0:00:00:00(hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR. You  
cannot rewrite only the time code.  
Remaining tape indicator  
The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape.  
Recording data  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed  
while recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto tape. To display the  
recording data, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback (p. 39).  
32  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g b a cklit su b je ct s BACK LIGHT  
When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a  
light background, use the backlight function.  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16), press BACK  
LIGHT.  
The . indicator appears on the screen.  
To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.  
BACK LIGHT  
If you press EXPOSURE w hen shooting backlit subjects  
The backlight function will be canceled.  
33  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g in t h e d a rk  
Nig h t Sh o t /Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t /Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r  
You can shoot a subject in a dark place. For example, you can satisfactorily record the  
environment of nocturnal animals for observation when you use this function.  
COLOR SLOW S  
SUPER NS  
NIGHTSHOT  
OFF  
ON  
COLOR SLOW S/  
SUPER NS  
NightShot Light emitter  
Usin g Nig h t Sh o t  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16), slide  
NIGHTSHOT to ON.  
The  
and NIGHTSHOTindicators flash on the screen.  
To cancel the NightShot mode, slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.  
Usin g Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t  
The Super NightShot mode makes subjects more than 16 times brighter than those  
recorded in the NightShot mode.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, slide NIGHTSHOT to ON. The  
and  
NIGHTSHOTindicators flash on the screen.  
(2) Press SUPER NS. The  
and SUPER NIGHTSHOTindicators flash on the  
screen. To return the NightShot mode, press SUPER NS again.  
Usin g Nig h t Sh o t Lig h t  
The picture will be clearer with the NightShot Light on. To enable the NightShot Light,  
set N.S.LIGHT in  
to ON in the menu settings. The default setting is ON.  
Usin g Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r  
The Color Slow Shutter function enables you to record color images in a dark place.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.  
(2) Press COLOR SLOW S.  
The  
and COLOR SLOW SHUTTERindicators flash on the screen.  
To cancel the Color Slow Shutter function, press COLOR SLOW S again.  
34  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Notes  
Do not use the NightShot mode in bright places (e.g. the outdoors in the daytime).  
This may cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
When you keep NIGHTSHOT set to ON in normal recording, the picture may be  
recorded in incorrect or unnatural colors.  
If focusing is difficult with the autofocus mode when using the NightShot mode, focus  
manually.  
While using NightShot, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
Exposure  
PROGRAM AE  
White balance  
While using Super NightShot, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
Exposure  
PROGRAM AE  
Fader  
Digital effect  
White balance  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or standby mode  
(except DCR-TRV16).  
While using Color Slow Shutter, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
Exposure  
PROGRAM AE  
Fader  
Digital effect  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or standby mode  
(except DCR-TRV16).  
While using Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter  
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted depending on the brightness. At this time,  
the motion of the picture may slow down.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16), you cannot use  
the follow ing functions:  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
NightShot Light  
NightShot Light rays are infrared and so are invisible. The maximum shooting distance  
using the NightShot Light is about 3 m (10 feet).  
In total darkness  
The Color Slow Shutter may not work normally.  
35  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Recording with the self-timer starts in 10 seconds automatically. You can also use the  
Remote Commander for this operation.  
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU, then select SELFTIMER in  
SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 177).  
with the  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(3) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(4) Press START/ STOP.  
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of  
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.  
4
START/STOP  
START/STOP  
CAMERA SET  
SELFTIMER  
2
OFF  
ON  
D
ZOOM  
PHOTO REC  
:
16 9WIDE  
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
1,3  
MENU  
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n  
Press START/ STOP.  
To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.  
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r  
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings in the standby mode.  
You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:  
Self-timer recording is finished.  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
You can also record still images on Memory Sticks with the self-timer (p. 116).  
36  
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s  
END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/Re c Re vie w  
You can use these buttons to check the recorded picture or shoot so that the transition  
between the last recorded scene and the next scene you record is smooth.  
EDITSEARCH  
END  
SEARCH  
END SEARCH  
You can go to the end of the recorded section after you record.  
Press END SEARCH in the standby mode.  
The last five seconds of the recorded section are played back and your camcorder  
returns to the standby mode. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or  
headphones.  
EDITSEARCH  
You can search for the next recording start point.  
Hold down the / + side of EDITSEARCH in the standby mode. The recorded portion is  
played back.  
: To go backward  
+ : To go forward  
Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/ STOP, recording begins  
from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound.  
Re c Re vie w  
You can check the last recorded section.  
Press the side of EDITSEARCH momentarily in the standby mode.  
The section you have stopped most recently will be played back for a few seconds, and  
then your camcorder will return to the standby mode. You can monitor the sound from  
the speaker or headphones.  
End search function  
When you use a cassette without cassette memory, the end search function does not  
work once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a  
cassette with cassette memory, the end search function works even once you eject the  
cassette.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The end search function may not work correctly.  
37  
Pla yb a ck Ba sics —  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
You can monitor the playback picture on the screen. If you close the LCD panel, you can  
monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can control playback using the  
Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.  
(1) Prepare the power supply and insert the recorded tape.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button.  
(3) Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN.  
(4) Press m to rewind the tape.  
(5) Press N to start playback.  
(6) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME. Sound is  
muted when the LCD panel is closed.  
: To turn the volume down  
+ : To turn the volume up  
2
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
3
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
1
5
6
4
REW  
PLAY  
VOLUME  
To st o p p la yb a ck  
Press x.  
When monitoring on the LCD screen  
You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the  
LCD screen facing out.  
If you leave the pow er on for a long time  
Your camcorder gets warm. This is not a malfunction.  
When you open or close the LCD panel  
38  
Make sure that the LCD panel is set vertically.  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
To d isp la y t h e scre e n in d ica t o rs Disp la y fu n ct io n  
Press DISPLAY on your camcorder or the Remote Commander. The indicators appear  
on the screen.  
To make the indicators disappear, press DISPLAY again.  
DATA CODE  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
Ab o u t d a t e /t im e a n d va rio u s se t t in g s  
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
In addition to images, your camcorder automatically records the recording data,  
including date/ time and various settings on the tape (data code).  
1 Set the POWER sw itch to VCR, then play back a tape.  
2 Press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander.  
The display changes as follows:  
date/ time t various settings (SteadyShot, white balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture  
value, exposure mode) t no indicator  
Date/time  
Various settings  
0:00:23:01  
50min  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
0:00:23:01  
50min  
AUTO  
60 AWB  
JUL  
4
2002  
[e ]  
[f]  
12:05:56 PM  
F2.0  
9dB  
[g ]  
[a ] Tape counter  
[b ] SteadyShot OFF  
[c] Exposure mode  
[d ] White balance  
[e ] Gain  
[f] Shutter speed  
[g ] Aperture value  
To not display various settings  
Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings (p. 184).  
The display changes as follows when you press DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander:  
date/ time y no indicator  
39  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
Various settings  
Various settings are your camcorders information when you have recorded. In the  
recording mode, the various settings will not be displayed.  
When you use the data code function, bars (--- -- ----) appear if:  
A blank portion of the tape is being played back.  
The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise.  
The tape was recorded by a camcorder without the date and time set.  
Data code  
The data code is displayed on the TV screen if you connect your camcorder to the TV.  
Remaining battery time indicator during playback  
The indicator shows the approximate continuous playback time. The indicator may not  
be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are playing back. When you close  
the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct remaining  
battery time to be displayed.  
Va rio u s p la yb a ck m o d e s  
To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR.  
To p la y b a ck p a u se (vie w a st ill im a g e )  
Press X during playback. To resume normal playback, press N or X.  
To a d va n ce t h e t a p e  
Press M in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.  
To re w in d t h e t a p e  
Press m in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.  
To ch a n g e t h e p la yb a ck d ire ct io n  
Press  
on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction.  
To resume normal playback, press N.  
To lo ca t e a sce n e m o n it o rin g t h e p ict u re (p ict u re se a rch )  
Keep pressing m or M during playback. To resume normal playback, release the  
button.  
To m o n it o r h ig h -sp e e d p ict u re s w h ile a d va n cin g o r re w in d in g  
t h e t a p e (skip sca n )  
Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while advancing the tape. To resume  
rewinding or advancing, release the button.  
To vie w t h e p ict u re a t slo w sp e e d (slo w p la yb a ck)  
Press y on the Remote Commander during playback. For slow playback in the reverse  
direction, press  
, then press y on the Remote Commander. To resume normal  
playback, press N.  
40  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
To vie w p ict u re s a t d o u b le sp e e d  
Press ×2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the  
reverse direction, press  
normal playback, press N.  
, then press ×2 on the Remote Commander. To resume  
To vie w p ict u re s fra m e -b y-fra m e  
Press C on the Remote Commander in the playback pause mode. For frame-by-frame  
playback in the reverse direction, press c. To resume normal playback, press N.  
To se a rch t h e la st sce n e re co rd e d (END SEARCH)  
Press END SEARCH in the stop mode. The last five seconds of the recorded portion  
plays back and stops.  
In the various playback modes  
Sound is muted.  
The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback.  
When the playback pause mode lasts for five minutes  
Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press N.  
Slow playback  
The slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder. However, this  
function does not work for an output signal through the DV IN/ OUT jack.  
When you play back a tape in reverse  
Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is  
not a malfunction.  
41  
Vie w in g t h e re co rd in g o n TV  
Connect your camcorder to your TV with the A/ V connecting cable supplied with your  
camcorder to watch playback pictures on the TV screen. You can operate the video  
control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the screen.  
When monitoring playback pictures on the TV screen, we recommend that you power  
your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC power adaptor (p. 22). Refer to the  
operating instructions of your TV.  
Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV using the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/ VCR selector on the TV to VCR.  
S VIDEO  
White  
IN  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
Yellow  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A/ V connecting cable  
(supplied)  
: Signal flow  
Red  
If yo u r TV is a lre a d y co n n e ct e d t o a VCR  
Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR by using the A/ V connecting  
cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.  
If yo u r TV o r VCR is a m o n a u ra l t yp e  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. If you connect the  
white plug, the sound is L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug, the sound is R  
(right) signal.  
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With  
this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect the S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and  
the TV or the VCR.  
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.  
To display the screen indicators on TV  
Set DISPLAY to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings (p. 184).  
Then press DISPLAY on your camcorder. To turn off the screen indicators, press  
DISPLAY on your camcorder again.  
42  
Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Op e ra t io n s —  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry  
St ickd u rin g re co rd in g o n a t a p e  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can record still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or standby  
mode. You can also record still images on a tape (p. 46).  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder (p. 106).  
Set PHOTO REC in  
to MEMORY in the menu settings. (The default setting is  
MEMORY.)  
(1) In the standby mode, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears.  
The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the  
still image, release PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold  
PHOTO lightly.  
(2) Press PHOTO deeper.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
The image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the  
Memory Stick.”  
[a ][b ]  
1
50min  
SFN  
1 / 12  
CAPTURE  
640  
PHOTO  
2
50min  
SFN  
640  
PHOTO  
[a ]: Number of recorded images  
[b ]: Approximate number of images that  
can be recorded on the Memory  
Stick”  
43  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ickd u rin g re co rd in g o n a  
t a p e  
Memory Stick”  
For more information, see page 105.  
Notes  
Do not shake or strike your camcorder when you record still images. The image may  
fluctuate.  
You cannot record still images on a Memory Stickduring following operations. The  
indicator fashes:  
Fader  
Picture effect  
Digital effect  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Wide mode  
MEMORY MIX  
Image size of still images (DCR-TRV25/TRV27 only)  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
When you want to record still images in different size, use the Memory Photo recording  
function (p. 112).  
When the POWER sw itch is set to CAMERA  
You cannot change image quality mode.  
The image quality mode you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY is  
used.  
To record still images using the Remote Commander  
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records the  
image on the screen.  
To record still images on a Memory Stickduring tape recording  
You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The image when  
you press PHOTO will be recorded on the Memory Stick.”  
During and after recording still images on a Memory Stick”  
Your camcorder continues recording on tape.  
To record images w ith higher quality  
We recommend you use the Memory Photo recording function (p. 112).  
Title  
The title cannot be recorded.  
44  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ickd u rin g re co rd in g o n a  
t a p e  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
You can record still images on a Memory Stickwith the self-timer. You can also use  
the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder (p. 106).  
Set PHOTO REC in  
to MEMORY in the menu settings. (The default setting is  
MEMORY.)  
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU, then select SELFTIMER in  
SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 177).  
with the  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(3) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(4) Press PHOTO deeper.  
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of  
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.  
4
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
CAMERA SET  
2
SELFTIMER  
OFF  
ON  
D
ZOOM  
PHOTO REC  
:
16 9WIDE  
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
1,3  
MENU  
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r  
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings in the standby mode.  
You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:  
self-timer recording is finished.  
the POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
Taking photos w ith the self-timer  
The self-timer can only be operated when in the standby mode.  
45  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e  
Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g  
You can record still images such as photographs on tapes.  
You can record about 510 images in the SP mode and about 765 images in the LP mode  
on a 60-minute tape.  
(1) In the recording standby, set PHOTO REC in  
to TAPE in the menu settings  
(p. 177). (except DCR-TRV16)  
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears.  
The picture becomes still image and the CAPTURE indicator appears.  
Recording does not start yet.  
To change the still image, release PHOTO, and then press and hold PHOTO  
lightly.  
(3) Press PHOTO deeper.  
The still image on the screen is recorded for about seven seconds. The sound  
during those seven seconds is also recorded. The still image is displayed on the  
screen until recording is completed.  
CAPTURE  
2
TO  
O
H
P
3
•••••••  
TO  
O
H
P
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h se lf-t im e r (e xce p t DCR-TRV16)  
(1) Set PHOTO REC in  
to TAPE in the menu settings (p. 177).  
(2) Follow steps 1 and 4 on page 45.  
Notes  
During tape photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting.  
When recording a still image, do not shake your camcorder. The image may fluctuate.  
The tape photo recording does not work while using the following functions. The  
indicator flashes.:  
Fader  
Digital effect  
46  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g  
If you record a moving subject w ith the tape photo recording  
The picture may fluctuate when you play back the still images on other equipment.  
This is not a malfunction.  
To use tape photo recording using the Remote Commander  
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder records a picture on the  
screen immediately.  
To use the tape photo recording during normal recording on a tape  
You cannot check the image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. Press PHOTO  
deeper. The still image is then recorded for about seven seconds and your camcorder  
returns to the standby mode.  
To record still images w ith higher quality (except DCR-TRV16)  
We recommend that you record on Memory Sticks using the memory photo  
recording (p. 112).  
47  
Ad ju st in g t h e w h it e b a la n ce m a n u a lly  
You can manually adjust and set the white balance. This adjustment makes white  
subjects look white and allows more natural color balance. Normally white balance is  
automatically adjusted.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16). Press  
MENU, then select WHT BAL in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 176).  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired white balance, then press  
dial.  
HOLD :  
When recording a single-colored subject or background  
(OUTDOOR) :  
When recording a sunset/ sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon  
signs, or fireworks  
Under a color-matching fluorescent lamp  
n (INDOOR) :  
Where lighting condition changes quickly  
When recording in TV lighting in a studio  
Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps  
1
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
P
D
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
FLASH MODE  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
AUTO  
HOLD  
N.S. LIGHT  
AUTO SHTR OUTDOOR  
RETURN  
] :  
INDOOR  
[
MENU END  
MENU  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic w h it e b a la n ce m o d e  
Set WHT BAL to AUTO in the menu settings.  
If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by TV lighting  
We recommend that you record in the INDOOR mode.  
When you record under fluorescent lighting  
Use the AUTO or HOLD mode.  
Your camcorder may not adjust the white balance correctly in the INDOOR mode.  
In the automatic w hite balance mode  
Point your camcorder at a white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER  
switch to CAMERA to get a better adjustment when:  
you detach the battery for replacement.  
you take your camcorder outdoors from inside a house holding the exposure, or vice  
versa.  
In the HOLD w hite balance mode  
Set the white balance to AUTO and reset to HOLD after a few seconds when:  
you change the PROGRAM AE mode.  
48  
you take your camcorder outdoors from inside a house, or vice versa.  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).  
Black bands appear on the screen during recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a ]. The picture  
during playback on a normal TV [b ] or on a wide-screen TV [c] is compressed in the  
longwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to the full mode,  
you can watch pictures of normal images [d ].  
If you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1/ ID-2 system, the screen size is  
automatically selected.  
[b ]  
[a ]  
16:9WIDE  
[c]  
[d ]  
(1) In the standby mode, turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select 16:9WIDE in  
in the menu settings, then press the dial (p. 177).  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
MENU  
To ca n ce l t h e w id e m o d e  
Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.  
In the w ide mode  
You cannot select the following functions:  
OLD MOVIE  
BOUNCE  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or standby mode  
(except DCR-TRV16)  
During recording  
You cannot select or cancel the wide mode. When you cancel the wide mode, set your  
camcorder to the standby mode and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.  
Connection for a TV  
Pictures recorded in the 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full  
size when:  
You connect your camcorder to a TV that is compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ ID-2)  
system.  
You connect your camcorder to the S video jack on the TV.  
49  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
ID-1 system  
The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio (screen horizontal/ vertical ratio) information (16:9,  
4:3, or letter box) with video signals.  
ID-2 system  
The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted  
between video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment using the  
A/ V connecting cable.  
50  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
You can fade in or out to give your recording a more professional appearance.  
[a ]  
STBY  
REC  
FADER  
M. FADER  
(mosaic)  
BOUNCE*  
OVERLAP*  
WIPE*  
DOT*  
[b ]  
STBY  
REC  
MONOTONE  
When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color.  
When fading out, the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white.  
* Fade in only  
51  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
(1) When fading in [a ]  
In the standby mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.  
When fading out [b ]  
In the recording mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
FADER t M. FADER t BOUNCE t MONOTONE t OVERLAP  
no indicator  
DOT  
WIPE  
The last selected fader mode is indicated first of all.  
(2) Press START/ STOP. The fader indicator stops flashing, then light up.  
After fade in/ out ends, your camcorder automatically returns to the normal  
mode.  
START/STOP  
1
FADER  
FADER  
To ca n ce l t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
Before pressing START/ STOP, press FADER until the indicator disappears.  
Note  
You cannot use the following functions while using the fader function. Also, you cannot  
use the fader function while using the following functions:  
Digital effect  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or standby mode  
(except DCR-TRV16)  
Tape Photo recording  
Interval recording  
Frame recording  
When you set the POWER sw itch to MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16)  
You cannot use the fader function.  
When the OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT indicator appear in the standby mode  
Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on a tape. While the image is  
being stored, the indicators flash fast, and the playback picture disappears. At this  
stage, the picture may not be recorded clearly, depending on the tape condition.  
52  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
While using the bounce function, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
Focus  
Zoom  
Picture effect  
Exposure  
Note on the bounce function  
The BOUNCE indicator does not appear in the following mode or functions:  
When D ZOOM is activated in the menu settings  
Wide mode  
Picture effect  
PROGRAM AE  
53  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Pict u re e ffe ct  
You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.  
NEG. ART [a ] : The color and brightness of the picture are reversed.  
SEPIA :  
The picture appears in sepia.  
B&W :  
The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white).  
SOLARIZE [b ] : The light intensity becomes clearer to make the picture look more like  
an illustration.  
SLIM [c] :  
STRETCH [d ] : The picture expands horizontally.  
PASTEL [e ] : The contrast of the picture is emphasized to make the picture look more  
like an animated cartoon.  
MOSAIC [f] : The picture appears mosaic-patterned.  
The picture expands vertically.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
[e ]  
[f]  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. Press MENU, then select P EFFECT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 176).  
(2) Select the desired picture effect mode with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
OFF  
NEG. ART  
SEPIA  
B&W  
SOLARIZE  
SLIM  
1
P
D
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
FLASH MODE  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
N. S. LIGHT  
AUTO SHTR  
RETURN  
STRETCH  
PASTEL  
MOSAIC  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
To ca n ce l t h e p ict u re e ffe ct fu n ct io n  
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
While using the picture effect function, you cannot select the follow ing functions:  
OLD MOVIE  
BOUNCE  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or standby mode  
(except DCR-TRV16)  
When you set the POWER sw itch to other than CAMERA  
Picture effect is automatically canceled.  
54  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Dig it a l e ffe ct  
You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions.  
Sound is recorded normally.  
STILL:  
You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.  
FLASH (Flash motion):  
You can record still images successively at constant intervals.  
LUMI. (Luminance key):  
You can swap a brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.  
TRAIL:  
You can record the picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.  
SLOW SHTR (Slow shutter):  
You can slow down the shutter speed. The slow shutter mode is good for recording  
dark pictures more brightly.  
OLD MOVIE:  
You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically  
sets the wide mode to ON and picture effect to SEPIA, and sets the appropriate shutter  
speed.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
STILL  
LUMI.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
55  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Dig it a l e ffe ct  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. Press MENU, then select D EFFECT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 176).  
(2) Select the desired digital effect mode in the menu settings, then press the SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial.  
In the STILL and LUMI. modes, the still image when pressing the dial is  
recorded in the memory.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect, then press the dial.  
The bars appear in the following modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL. The  
more bars there are on the screen, the stronger the digital effect.  
Items to be adjusted  
STILL  
The rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the moving  
picture  
FLASH  
LUMI.  
Frame by frame playback  
The color scheme of the area in the still image which is to be  
swapped with a moving picture  
TRAIL  
The time until the incidental image vanishes  
SLOW SHTR Shutter speed. The larger the shutter speed number, the slower the  
shutter speed becomes.  
OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary  
MENU  
2
3
1
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
D
D
D
OFF  
OFF  
P
D
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
STILL  
LUMI.  
STILL  
FLASH  
FLASH MODE I I I I I I I I I I I I  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
N. S. LIGHT  
FLASH  
LUMI.  
LUMI.  
I I I I I I I I •  
LUMI.  
TRAIL  
TRAIL  
SLOW SHTR  
OLD MOVIE  
SLOW SHTR  
OLD MOVIE  
AUTO SHTR  
RETURN  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l t h e d ig it a l e ffe ct fu n ct io n  
Set D EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
56  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Dig it a l e ffe ct  
Notes  
The following functions do not work during digital effect:  
Fader  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or standby mode  
(except DCR-TRV16)  
Tape Photo recording  
The PROGRAM AE function does not work in the slow shutter mode.  
The following functions do not work in the old movie mode:  
Wide mode  
Picture effect  
PROGRAM AE  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)  
Digital effect will be automatically canceled.  
When recording in the slow shutter mode  
Auto focus may not be effective. Focus manually using a tripod.  
Shutter speed  
Shutter speed number  
SLOW SHTR 1  
SLOW SHTR 2  
SLOW SHTR 3  
SLOW SHTR 4  
Shutter speed  
1/ 30  
1/ 15  
1/ 8  
1/ 4  
57  
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE fu n ct io n  
You can select PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) mode to suit your specific shooting  
requirements.  
SPOTLIGHT:  
This mode prevents peoples faces, for example, from appearing excessively white  
when shooting subjects lit by strong light in the theater.  
PORTRAIT (Soft portrait):  
This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as  
people or flowers.  
SPORTS (Sports lesson):  
This mode minimizes camera-shake on fast-moving subjects such as in tennis or golf.  
BEACH&SKI:  
This mode prevents peoples faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light,  
such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.  
SUNSETMOON (Sunset & moon):  
This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general  
night views, fireworks displays and neon signs.  
LANDSCAPE:  
This mode is for when you are recording distant subjects such as mountains, and  
prevents your camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you  
are recording a subject behind glass or a screen.  
58  
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE fu n ct io n  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16). Press  
MENU, then select PROGRAM AE in  
(p. 176).  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(2) Select the desired mode with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE AUTO  
1
P
D
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
SPOTLIGHT  
PORTRAIT  
FLASH MODE SPORTS  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
N. S. LIGHT  
AUTO SHTR  
RETURN  
BEACH&SKI  
SUNSETMOON  
LANDSCAPE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
To ca n ce l t h e PROGRAM AE fu n ct io n  
Set PROGRAM AE to AUTO in the menu settings.  
Notes  
Because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance,  
you cannot take close-ups in the following mode:  
SPOTLIGHT  
SPORTS  
BEACH&SKI  
Your camcorder is set to focus only on distant subjects in the following modes:  
SUNSETMOON  
LANDSCAPE  
The following functions do not work in the PROGRAM AE function:  
Color Slow Shutter  
Slow shutter  
OLD MOVIE  
BOUNCE  
While setting the NIGHTSHOT to ON, the PROGRAM AE function does not work.  
The indicator flashes.  
When you set the POWER switch to MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16), Sports lesson  
mode does not work. The indicator flashes.  
While WHT BAL is set to AUTO in the menu settings  
The white balance is adjusted even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected.  
Even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected  
You can adjust the exposure.  
If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium  
lamp or mercury lamp  
Flickering or changes in color may occur in the following modes. If this happens, cancel  
the PROGRAM AE function.  
PORTRAIT  
SPORTS  
59  
Ad ju st in g t h e e xp o su re m a n u a lly  
You can manually adjust and set the exposure. Normally exposure is automatically  
adjusted. Adjust the exposure manually in the following cases:  
When the subject is backlit  
When the subject is too bright against the background  
When recording dark pictures (e.g. night scenes) faithfully  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16), press  
EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator appears.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness.  
2
1
EXPOSURE  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re m o d e  
Press EXPOSURE again.  
When you adjust the exposure manually, the follow ing functions do not w ork:  
Color Slow Shutter  
BACK LIGHT  
Your camcorder automatically returns to the automatic exposure mode:  
If you change the PROGRAM AE mode.  
If you slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.  
60  
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly  
Normally, focus is automatically adjusted.  
However, you can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following  
cases:  
The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting  
Subjects through glass coated with water droplets  
Horizontal stripes  
Subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls and sky  
When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in  
the background  
Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16), press  
FOCUS/ INFINITY lightly. The 9 (manual focus) indicator appears.  
(2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen focus.  
2
1
FOCUS/INFINITY  
Focus ring  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s m o d e  
Press FOCUS/ INFINITY lightly to turn off the indicator.  
To re co rd d ist a n t su b je ct s  
When you press FOCUS/ INFINITY down firmly, the lens focuses on the infinity and  
indicator appears. When you release FOCUS/ INFINITY, your camcorder returns to the  
manual focus mode. Use this mode when your camcorder focuses on near objects even  
though you are trying to shoot a distant object.  
To focus precisely  
It is easier to focus on subjects if you adjust the zoom to shoot at the W(wide-angle)  
after focusing at the T(telephoto) position.  
When you shoot close to the subject  
Focus at the end of the W(wide-angle) position.  
9 changes as follow s:  
when recording a distant subject.  
when the subject is too close to focus on.  
61  
In t e rva l re co rd in g  
You can make a time-lapse recording by setting the camcorder to automatically record  
and standby sequentially. You can achieve an excellent recording for flowering, gradual  
appearances, etc., with this function.  
Example  
1 s  
1 s  
[a ]  
[b ]  
9 min 59 s  
10 min  
9 min 59 s  
10 min  
[c]  
[a ]:REC TIME  
[b ]:Waiting time  
[c]: INTERVAL  
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU. Select INT. REC in  
with the SEL/ PUSH  
EXEC dial (p. 177).  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.  
(3) Set INTERVAL and REC TIME.  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then  
press the dial.  
The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN  
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial.  
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then  
press the dial.  
The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC  
5 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
RETURN, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The INTERVAL indicator flashes.  
(6) Press START/ STOP to start interval recording. The INTERVAL indicator lights  
up.  
62  
In t e rva l re co rd in g  
6
CAMERA SET  
SELFTIMER  
CAMERA SET  
I NT. REC  
I NTERVAL 30SEC  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
2
D
ZOOM  
PHOTO REC  
16 : 9W I DE  
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC  
I NT. REC  
ON  
OFF  
SET  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
3
CAMERA SET  
INT. REC  
INTERVAL  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
CAMERA SET  
INT. REC  
INTERVAL  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
1
2
4
5
I NTERVAL  
30SEC  
1MIN  
30SEC  
5MIN  
10MIN  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
CAMERA SET  
SELFTIMER  
ZOOM  
PHOTO REC  
16 9WIDE  
CAMERA SET  
INT. REC  
INTERVAL  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
CAMERA SET  
INT. REC  
INTERVAL  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
3
4
D
0.5SEC  
1SEC  
1.5SEC  
2SEC  
0.5SEC  
:
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
ON  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l t h e in t e rva l re co rd in g  
Perform either of the following:  
Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings.  
Set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA.  
To su sp e n d in t e rva l re co rd in g a n d p e rfo rm n o rm a l re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP during the interval time except during recording time. The  
INTERVAL indicator flashes and normal recording starts.  
To restart interval recording, stop recording and then press START/ STOP again.  
The INTERVAL indicator stops flashing and remains on, and recording time begins.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16)  
You cannot do interval recording.  
On recording time  
There may be a discrepancy in the recording time of up to / + six frames from the  
selected time.  
When pressing START/STOP during recording time  
Interval recording stops. To restart it, perform step 6.  
63  
Fra m e b y fra m e re co rd in g  
Fra m e re co rd in g  
You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using frame recording.  
To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a frame recording.  
We recommend that you use a tripod, and operate your camcorder using the Remote  
Commander after step 4.  
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU. Select FRAME REC in  
PUSH EXEC dial (p. 177).  
with the SEL/  
(2) Select ON with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
(3) Press MENU to erase the menu display.  
The FRAME REC indicator lights up.  
(4) Press START/ STOP to start frame recording. Your camcorder makes a  
recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby.  
(5) Move the subject, and repeat step 4.  
4
MENU  
2
CAMERA SET  
SELFTIMER  
CAMERA SET  
SELFTIMER  
D
ZOOM  
D
ZOOM  
PHOTO REC  
16:9WIDE  
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC OFF  
INT. REC  
RETURN  
PHOTO REC  
16:9WIDE  
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC ON  
INT. REC  
ON  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l t h e fra m e re co rd in g  
Perform either of the following:  
Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings.  
Set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA.  
Note  
The proper remaining tape is not indicated if you use the frame recording function  
continuously.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16)  
You cannot use the frame recording.  
When using the frame recording function  
The last recorded frame is longer than other frame.  
64  
Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck Op e ra t io n s —  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e s w it h p ict u re e ffe ct  
During playback, you can process a scene using the following picture effect functions:  
NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.  
(1) In the playback or playback pause mode, press MENU. Select P EFFECT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 176).  
(2) Select the desired mode by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
For details of each picture effect function, see page 54.  
MANUAL SET  
P
D
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
OFF  
NEG. ART  
SEPIA  
B&W  
SOLARIZE  
1
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
To ca n ce l t h e p ict u re e ffe ct  
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
Notes  
You cannot process externally input scenes using the picture effect function.  
To record images that you have processed using the picture effect function, record  
images on a Memory Stick(except DCR-TRV16) (p. 117, 128), or on a VCR using  
your camcorder as a player.  
Pictures processed by picture effect functions  
Pictures processed by the picture effect function are not output through the DV IN/  
OUT jack.  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back  
The picture effect function is automatically canceled.  
65  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e s w it h d ig it a l e ffe ct  
During playback, you can process a scene using the following digital effect functions:  
STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.  
(1) In the playback or playback pause mode, press MENU. Select D EFFECT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 176).  
(2) Select the desired digital effect mode in the menu settings, then press the SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial. The digital effect indicator lights up and the bars appear. In  
the STILL or LUMI. mode, the image where you press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC  
dial is stored in memory as a still image.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect, then press the dial.  
For details of each digital effect function, see page 55.  
1
2
3
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
OFF  
STILL  
FLASH  
LUMI.  
TRAIL  
MANUAL  
D
P
D
EFFECT  
EFFECT LUMI  
.
RETURN  
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
OFF  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
D
D
STILL  
FLASH  
LUMI.  
TRAIL  
LUMI.  
I I I I I I I I •  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l t h e d ig it a l e ffe ct  
Set D EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
Notes  
You cannot process externally input scenes using digital effect functions.  
To record images that you have processed the image using the digital effect function,  
record images on a Memory Stick(except DCR-TRV16) (p. 117, 128), or on a VCR  
using your camcorder as a player.  
Pictures processed by digital effect functions  
Pictures processed by digital effect functions are not output through the DV IN/  
OUT jack.  
You cannot use the tape PB ZOOM function for pictures processed by digital effect  
functions.  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back  
The digital effect function is automatically canceled.  
66  
En la rg in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e  
Ta p e PB ZOOM  
You can enlarge playback images recorded on tapes. Besides the operation described  
here, your camcorder can enlarge still images recorded on Memory Sticks (except  
DCR-TRV16) (p. 145).  
(1) In the playback or playback pause mode, press PB ZOOM on your camcorder.  
The center of the image is enlarged to about twice its size, and  
on the screen.  
appears  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the  
dial.  
R : The image moves downwards.  
r : The image moves upwards.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the  
dial.  
t : The image moves leftward (Turn the dial upwards.)  
T : The image moves rightward (Turn the dial downwards.)  
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.  
You can enlarge the image from about 1.1 times up to five times its size.  
W : Decreases the zoom ratio.  
T : Increases the zoom ratio.  
4
PB ZOOM  
× 5.0  
T
W
[
] :  
EXEC  
1
PB  
ZOOM  
2
3
PB ZOOM  
× 2.0  
PB ZOOM  
× 2.0  
[
] :  
EXEC  
[
] :  
EXEC  
To ca n ce l t h e PB ZOOM fu n ct io n  
Press PB ZOOM.  
Notes  
You cannot process externally input scenes using the PB ZOOM function with your  
camcorder.  
You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the  
image using the tape PB ZOOM function. However, you can record images on a VCR  
using your camcorder as a player.  
You cannot record moving pictures on a Memory Stick(except DCR-TRV16) on  
your camcorder when you have processed the picture using the tape PB ZOOM  
function.  
67  
En la rg in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e Ta p e PB ZOOM  
Pictures in the PB ZOOM  
Pictures in the PB ZOOM mode are not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack and the  
(USB) jack.  
The PB ZOOM function is automatically canceled w hen you execute the follow ing  
functions:  
Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)  
Stop playback  
Display the menu settings  
Insert a Memory Stick(except DCR-TRV16)  
68  
Qu ickly lo ca t in g a sce n e  
ZERO SET MEMORY  
Your camcorder goes forward or backward to automatically stop at a desired scene  
having a tape counter value of 0:00:00. Use the Remote Commander for this  
operation.  
(1) In the playback mode, press DISPLAY.  
(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape  
counter shows 0:00:00and then starts counting. The ZERO SET MEMORY  
indicator flashes.  
(3) Press x when you want to stop playback.  
(4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape counters zero point. The tape stops  
automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO  
SET MEMORY indicator disappears, and the time code appears.  
(5) Press N. Playback starts from the counters zero point.  
DISPLAY  
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
m
x
N
Notes  
When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory  
function will be canceled.  
There may be a discrepancy of several seconds from the time code.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The zero set memory function may not work correctly.  
69  
Se a rch in g t h e b o u n d a rie s o f re co rd e d  
t a p e b y t it le TITLE SEARCH  
If you use a cassette with cassette memory, you can search for the boundaries of  
recorded tape by title. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Before operation  
Set CM SEARCH in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the TITLE  
SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH  
no indicator  
PHOTO SCAN  
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that  
you selected.  
TITLE SEARCH  
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
HELLO!  
SEARCH  
MODE  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
HAPPY NEW YEAR!  
PRESENT  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
TITLE SEARCH  
3
4
5
6
7
8
HAPPY NEW YEAR!  
PRESENT  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
NIGHT  
.
>
BASEBALL  
[b ] [a ]  
[a ]:Actual point you are trying to search for  
[b ]:Present point on the tape  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
If you use a cassette w ithout cassette memory  
You cannot superimpose or search a title.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The title search function may not work correctly.  
To superimpose a title  
See page 98.  
70  
Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e  
DATE SEARCH  
You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start  
playback from that point. Use a tape with cassette memory for convenience. Use the  
Remote Commander for this operation.  
Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each  
recording date.  
Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e b y u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry  
Before operation  
You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with cassette memory.  
Set CM SEARCH in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE  
SEARCH indicator appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH  
no indicator  
PHOTO SCAN  
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected  
date.  
DATE SEARCH  
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP / 5 / 02  
SEP / 6 / 02  
DEC / 24 / 02  
SEARCH  
MODE  
JAN  
/
1 / 03  
FEB / 11 / 03  
APR / 29 / 03  
DATE SEARCH  
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP / 5 / 02  
SEP / 6 / 02  
DEC / 24 / 02  
.
>
JAN  
/
1 / 03  
FEB / 11 / 03  
APR / 29 / 03  
[b ] [a ]  
[a ]:Actual point you are trying to search for  
[b ]:Present point on the tape  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
71  
Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e DATE SEARCH  
Note  
If one days recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find  
the point where the recording date changes.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The date search function may not work correctly.  
Cassette memory  
The tape with cassette memory can hold six recording data. If you search among seven  
or more data, see Searching for the date without using cassette memorybelow.  
Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e w it h o u t u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Set CM SEARCH in  
to OFF in the menu settings (p. 181).  
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE  
SEARCH indicator appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator  
(4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press  
> on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder  
automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time  
you press . or > your camcorder searches for the previous or next date.  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
72  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o  
PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN  
You can search for a still image you have recorded on a tape (PHOTO SEARCH). It is  
convenient to use the cassette with the cassette memory.  
You can also search for still images one after another and display each picture for five  
seconds automatically regardless of cassette memory (PHOTO SCAN). Use the Remote  
Commander for these operations.  
Use this function to check or edit still images.  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o b y u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry  
Before operation  
You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with cassette memory.  
Set CM SEARCH in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly, until the  
PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH  
no indicator  
T
PHOTO SCAN  
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date  
that you selected.  
PHOTO SEARCH  
2
3
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP / 5 / 02  
SEP / 6 / 02  
5 30PM  
SEARCH  
MODE  
:
8 50AM  
:
DEC / 24 / 02 10 30AM  
:
JAN  
/
1 / 03 11 25PM  
:
FEB / 11 / 03  
APR / 29 / 03  
4 11PM  
:
1 45PM  
PHOTO SEARCH  
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP / 5 / 02  
SEP / 6 / 02  
DEC / 24 / 02 10 30AM  
5 30PM  
:
8 50AM  
:
.
>
:
JAN  
/
1 / 03 11 25PM  
:
FEB / 11 / 03  
APR / 29 / 03  
4 11PM  
:
1 45PM  
[b ] [a ]  
MENU  
[a ]: Actual point you are trying to search for  
[b ]: Present point on the tape  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
73  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o w it h o u t u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Set CM SEARCH in  
to OFF in the menu settings (p. 181).  
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the  
PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no indicator  
(4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the photo for playback.  
Each time you press . or > your camcorder searches for the previous or  
next photo.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo.  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
Sca n n in g p h o t o  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the  
PHOTO SCAN indicator appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH* t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH  
no indicator  
T
PHOTO SCAN  
* TITLE SEARCH is displayed when CM SEARCH is set to ON in the menu  
settings.  
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander.  
Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically.  
2
SEARCH  
MODE  
PHOTO 00  
SCAN  
3
1
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
To st o p sca n n in g  
Press x.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The photo search/ photo scan function may not work correctly.  
The available number of photos that can be searched using the cassette memory  
The available number is up to 12 photos. However, you can search 13 photos or more  
using the photo scan function.  
74  
Ed it in g —  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
You can dub or edit on the VCR connected to your camcorder using your camcorder as  
a player. Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/ V connecting cable supplied  
with your camcorder.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The defalt setting is LCD.)  
Press the following buttons to make the indicator disappear so that they will not be  
superimposed on the edited tape:  
DISPLAY  
DATA CODE on the Remote Commander  
SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert  
the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE.  
Connect the A/ V connecting cable to the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack.  
Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.  
(5) Start recording on the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
S VIDEO  
IN  
Yellow  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VCR  
Red  
White  
: Signal flow  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
You can edit on VCRs that support the follow ing systems:  
8 mm,  
Betamax,  
Hi8,  
VHS,  
ED Betamax,  
S-VHS,  
mini DV,  
VHSC,  
DV, Digital8,  
S-VHSC,  
MICRO MV  
75  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
If your VCR is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white  
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,  
the right channel audio is output.  
If your VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
VCR.  
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) to DV IN/ OUT jack  
on your camcorder and to DV IN on the DV products. With a digital-to-digital  
connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality  
editing. You can not dub the titles, display indicators, the contents of cassette memory  
or letters on the Memory Stickindex screen (except DCR-TRV16).  
Set the input selector on the VCR to the DV input position if the VCR is equipped with  
the input selector.  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert  
the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording.  
Set the input selector to LINE (DV input position). Refer to the operating  
instructions of the VCR.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.  
(5) Start recording on the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
DV  
DV IN/ OUT  
DV IN  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
: Signal flow  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
76  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)  
See page 199 for more information about i.LINK.  
Pictures processed by the picture effect, the digital effect or PB ZOOM function  
Pictures processed by the picture effect, the digital effect or PB ZOOM function are not  
output through the DV IN/ OUT jack.  
If you record a playback pause picture w ith the DV IN/OUT jack  
The recorded picture becomes rough. Also, when you play back the picture using other  
video equipment, the picture may jitter.  
77  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s  
Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating  
the VCR.  
Scenes can be selected by frame. You can set up to 20 programs.  
Your camcorder can dub on Memory Sticks (except DCR-TRV16). See page 132 for  
more information.  
Unwanted scene  
Unwanted scene  
Switch the order  
Be fo re o p e ra t in g t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g o n t a p e s  
re co rd e d o n o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
Step 1 Connecting the VCR (p. 78).  
Step 2 Setting the VCR for operation.  
Using the A/ V connecting cable (p. 79)  
Using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (p. 83)  
Step 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 84).  
When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip steps 2 and 3.  
Usin g t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g fu n ct io n o n t a p e s re co rd e d  
o n o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
Operation 1 Making a program (p. 86).  
Operation 2 Performing the program (dubbing a tape) (p. 88).  
Note  
When editing digital video on tapes, the operation signals cannot be sent with  
LANC.  
St e p 1: Co n n e ct in g t h e VCR  
You can connect both the A/ V connecting cable and the i.LINK cable (DV connecting  
cable).  
When you use the A/ V connecting cable, connect the devices as illustrated on page 75.  
When you use the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), connect the devices as illustrated  
on page 76.  
If you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)  
With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital  
form for high-quality editing.  
78  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e w it h t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
To edit using the VCR, send the control signal by infrared rays to the remote sensor on  
the VCR.  
When you connect using the A/ V connecting cable, follow the procedure below, (1) to  
(4), to send the control signal correctly.  
(1) Se t t h e IR SETUP co d e  
1 Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
2 Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE.  
When you connect a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/ VTR.  
3 Press MENU. Select VIDEO EDIT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 184).  
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial. (except  
DCR-TRV16)  
5 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.  
6 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.  
7 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial.  
8 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP, then select IR SETUP code  
of your VCR, then press the dial. Check the code in About IR SETUP code.”  
(p. 80)  
MENU  
3
4
5
6
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT READY  
RETURN  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
IR  
i. LINK  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
] :  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
MENU END  
8
:
:
:
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
0 08 55 06  
IN  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
1
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
] :  
TAPE  
3
:
:
:
MEMORY  
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
0
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
MENU END  
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
UNDO  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
IR  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
IR  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
79  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
About IR SETUP codes  
The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the  
correct code to match your VCR. The default setting is code number 3.  
Brand  
IR SETUP code  
Brand  
IR SETUP code  
22, 23, 24, 28, 29  
23, 32, 80  
21, 33, 35  
77, 78  
Sony  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
Mitsubishi/ MGA  
Multitech  
NEC  
Admiral (M. Wards) 89  
Aiwa  
47, 54, 80  
Akai  
49, 51  
21, 35  
36  
Olympic  
Optimus  
Orion  
Audio Dynamic  
22  
Bell&Howell  
(M. Wards)  
60  
Panasonic  
Pentax  
16, 17, 77, 78  
8, 42  
Broksonic  
Canon  
21, 70, 82  
77, 78  
Philco  
26, 70, 77, 78  
47, 77, 78, 83  
78  
Citizen  
47  
Philips  
Craig  
47, 73  
Pioneer  
Curtis Mathis  
Daewoo  
DBX  
8, 77, 80  
Quasar  
6, 16, 17, 77, 78  
26, 40, 77  
RCA/ PROSCAN  
7, 8, 16, 40, 41, 42, 77, 78*, 83,  
101  
21, 33, 35  
Dimensia  
Emerson  
Fisher  
8
Realistic  
Sansui  
22, 36, 37, 77, 80, 88  
26, 48, 59, 70, 80, 81, 82  
21  
36, 37, 44, 45  
Singer  
73  
Funai  
80  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
24, 24*, 32, 32*, 41, 94, 94*  
General Electric  
Goldstar/ LG  
GO VIDEO  
Hitachi  
8, 32*, 77, 94*, 101  
26, 36, 37, 47  
47  
Scott  
22, 23, 24, 28, 32, 37, 40, 41  
71  
Sharp  
88, 89  
8, 42, 78  
Shintom  
Signature 2000  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
Tashiro  
Tatung  
Teac  
73  
HQ  
40  
80, 89  
Instant Replay  
JC Penny  
JVC  
77, 78  
77, 78, 80, 83  
80  
8, 21, 33, 35, 36, 42, 77  
12, 13, 14, 21, 33, 35  
21, 33, 35, 47  
36, 37, 42, 44, 45, 47, 49, 80  
17, 77, 78, 83  
21, 33, 35  
47  
Kenwood  
LXI (Sears)  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Marta  
21, 33, 35  
21, 33, 35, 80  
77, 78  
Technics  
Toshiba  
Wards  
7, 40, 49  
37, 47, 88, 89, 95  
21, 33, 35, 36  
95  
47  
Memorex  
Minolta  
37, 77  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
8, 42  
* TV/ VCR component  
Note on IR SETUP codes  
Digital program editing is not possible if the VCR does not support IR SETUP codes.  
80  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
(2) Se t t in g t h e m o d e s t o ca n ce l t h e re co rd in g p a u se o n t h e VCR  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the mode to cancel recording pause  
on the VCR, then press the dial.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDITSET  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDITSET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE PAUSE  
IR TEST  
0 08 55 06  
1
2
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE PAUSE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
REC  
PB  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
Buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR  
The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:  
Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X.  
Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z.  
Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is N.  
(3) Se t t in g yo u r ca m co rd e r a n d t h e VCR t o fa ce e a ch o t h e r  
Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote  
sensor of the VCR.  
Set the devices about 30 cm (12 in.) apart, and remove any obstacles between the  
devices.  
Infrared rays emitter  
VCR  
Remote sensor  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
81  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
(4) Co n firm in g VCR o p e ra t io n  
1 Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set to recording pause.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial.  
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.  
When recording is finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 08 55 06  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDITSET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDITSET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
2
3
CUTOUTENGAGE  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
REC PAUSE  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
COMPLETE  
RETURN  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
Wh e n t h e VCR d o e s n o t o p e ra t e co rre ct ly  
After checking the code in About IR SETUP codes,set the IR SETUP or the  
PAUSEMODE again.  
Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
82  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e w it h t h e i.LINK ca b le  
(DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
When you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional), follow the  
procedure below.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV  
input. When you connect a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch  
to VCR/ VTR.  
(3) Press MENU. Select VIDEO EDIT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 184).  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial (except  
DCR-TRV16).  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial.  
MENU  
3
4
5
6
:
:
:
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT READY  
RETURN  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
IR  
i. LINK  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
] :  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
MENU END  
7
:
:
:
:
:
:
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
0 08 55 06  
IN  
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
1
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
i. LINK  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
] :  
TAPE  
:
:
:
MEMORY  
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
0
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
MENU END  
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
UNDO  
0 08 55 06  
IR  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
IR  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
83  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
When you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)  
You cannot dub the titles, display indicators.  
You may not be able to operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the  
VCR. Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder.  
St e p 3: Ad ju st in g t h e syn ch ro n iza t io n o f t h e VCR  
You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR. Have a pen and  
paper ready for notes. Before operation, eject a cassette from your camcorder.  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, then set  
to recording pause.  
When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, you do not need to set to recording  
pause.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
IN and OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate the  
number values for adjusting the synchronization.  
The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the screen.  
When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
(4) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback.  
Take a note of the first number value of each IN and the closing number value  
of each OUT.  
(5) Calculate the average of all the first number values of each IN, and the  
average of all the last number values of each OUT.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUT-IN, then press the dial.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the average number value of IN, then  
press the dial.  
The calculated start position for recording is set.  
(8) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUT-OUT, then press the dial.  
(9) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the average number value of OUT,  
then press the dial.  
The calculated stop position for recording is set.  
(10)Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
RETURN, then press the dial.  
84  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
2,3  
6
8
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
0 08 55 06  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE ENGAGE  
0
IR TEST  
RETURN  
REC PAUSE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
RETURN  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
[
] :  
MENU END  
EXECUTING  
CUTOUTNo. 5  
IR SETUP IN  
PAUSEMODE 60  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
MENU END  
[
] :  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
0 08 55 06  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
COMPLETE  
0
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
RETURN  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
Notes  
When you complete step 3, the image used to adjust the syncronization is recorded for  
about 50 seconds.  
If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the  
tape may not record properly. Be sure to allow about 10 secondslead before starting  
recording.  
When you connect with the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you may not be able  
to operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR. Keep the i.LINK  
connection and set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings (p. 79). Video and audio are  
sent by digital signals.  
85  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
Op e ra t io n 1: Ma kin g t h e p ro g ra m  
(1) Insert the tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for  
recording into the VCR.  
(2) Press MENU, then select VIDEO EDIT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial (except  
DCR-TRV16).  
(4) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
operation buttons, then pause playback.  
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MARK, then press the dial.  
The IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark  
changes to light blue.  
(6) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
operation buttons, then pause playback.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MARK, then press the dial.  
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(8) Repeat steps 4 to 7, then set the program.  
When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.  
You can set up to 20 programs in maximum.  
MENU  
2
5
3
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT READY  
RETURN  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
MARK  
1
IN  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
TAPE  
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
MEMORY  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
7
8
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
OUT  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 09 07 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
0 10 01 23  
1
2
IN  
MARK  
UNDO  
4
IN  
UNDO  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
:
0
:
:
:
1
:
:
:
3
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
TOTAL 0 00 12 00  
SCENE  
TOTAL 0 00 47 12  
SCENE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
86  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t  
Erase OUT first and then IN from the last set program.  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.  
To cancel erasing  
Select RETURN in step 2.  
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s  
(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial (except  
DCR-TRV16).  
(3) Select ERASE ALL in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.  
To cancel erasing all programs  
Select RETURN in step 3.  
To cancel a program you have set  
Press MENU.  
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.  
Note  
You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing.  
On a blank portion of the tape  
You cannot set IN or OUT on blank portions of the tape.  
If there is a blank portion betw een IN and OUT on the tape  
The total time code may not be displayed correctly.  
87  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
Op e ra t io n 2: Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g a t a p e )  
Make sure your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to recording  
pause. (When you use the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) this procedure is not  
necessary.)  
When you use a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/ VTR.  
(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select TAPE, then press the dial (except DCR-TRV16).  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then select EXECUTE.  
Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing.  
The program mark flashes.  
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator  
appears during edit on the screen.  
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing ends.  
When dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop.  
To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g  
Press x using the video operation buttons.  
To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g fu n ct io n  
Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO  
EDIT in the menu settings.  
Press MENU to end the Digital program editing function.  
You cannot record on the VCR w hen:  
The tape has run out.  
The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to lock.  
The IR SETUP code is not correct (when IR is selected).  
The button to cancel recording pause is not correct (when IR is selected).  
NOT READY appears on the LCD screen w hen:  
The program to operate the Digital program editing has not been made.  
i.LINK is selected but the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) is not connected.  
The power of the connected VCR is not turned on (when you set i.LINK).  
88  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/  
audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder. If  
you are recording a tape from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,  
then immediately press X on your camcorder.  
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select  
a TV program if you are recording from a TV. The picture from a TV or VCR  
appears on the screen.  
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording  
from.  
PAUSE  
REC  
3
S VIDEO  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUT  
TV  
Yellow  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
VCR  
Red  
White  
: Signal flow  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
89  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
If your VCR or TV is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video output jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white  
plug is connected, the left channel audio is recorded, and when the red plug is  
connected, the right channel audio is recorded.  
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
TV or VCR.  
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.  
90  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) to DV IN/ OUT jack  
on your camcorder and to DV OUT on the DV products. With a digital-to-digital  
connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality  
editing.  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder,  
and insert the recorded tape into the VCR.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,  
then immediately press X on your camcorder.  
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback. The picture to be recorded appears on  
the screen.  
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording  
from.  
PAUSE  
3
REC  
DV IN/ OUT  
DV  
DV OUT  
: Signal flow  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on your camcorder, and then press the stop button on the VCR.  
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).  
When you dub a picture in digital form  
The color of the display may be uneven. However, this does not affect the dubbed  
picture.  
If you record the playback paused picture w ith the DV IN/OUT jack  
The recorded picture becomes rough. When you play back the picture using your  
camcorder, the picture may jitter.  
Before recording  
Make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the screen. The DV IN indicator may  
appear on both equipment.  
91  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR  
In se rt Ed it in g  
You can insert a new scene with sound from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape  
by specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this  
operation. Connections are the same as on page 89 or 91.  
Insert a cassette containing the desired scene to insert into the VCR.  
[a ]  
[A]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[B]  
[C]  
[A]: A tape that contains the scene to be superimposed  
[B]: A tape before editing  
[C]: A tape after editing  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(2) On the connected VCR, locate just before the insert start point [a ], then press X  
to set the VCR to the playback pause mode.  
(3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c] by pressing m or M.  
Then press X to set your camcorder to the playback pause mode.  
(4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET  
MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in  
memory. The tape counter shows 0:00:00.”  
(5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b ] by pressing m, then press  
z REC and the button on its right simultaneously.  
(6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press X on your camcorder  
to start inserting the new scene with sound.  
Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your  
camcorder automatically stops recording and the ZERO SET MEMORY is  
canceled.  
92  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR In se rt Ed it in g  
5
REC  
0:00:00  
4
ZERO SET  
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
To ch a n g e t h e in se rt e n d p o in t  
Press ZERO SET MEMORY again after step 5 to erase the ZERO SET MEMORY  
indicator and begin from step 3.  
Note  
Pictures and sound recorded on the portion between the insert start and end points will  
be erased when you insert the new scene.  
If you insert scenes on the tape recorded on another camcorder  
The pictures and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a  
tape recorded on your camcorder.  
When the inserted picture is played back  
Pictures and sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted portion. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Pictures and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP  
mode.  
To insert a scene w ithout setting the insert end point  
Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x on your camcorder when you want to stop inserting.  
93  
Au d io d u b b in g  
If you connect audio equipment, you can add sound to your recorded tape already  
recorded in the 12-bit mode by specifying the start and end points. The original sound  
will not be erased.  
Select one of the following connections to add audio.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e w it h t h e MIC ja ck  
MIC  
(PLUG IN  
POWER)  
: Signal flow  
Microphone (optional)  
You can check recorded picture and sound by connecting your camcorder to a TV with  
the A/ V connecting cable.  
Recorded sound is not output from the speaker. Check the sound by using a TV or  
headphones.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e t o t h e in t e llig e n t a cce sso ry sh o e  
Intelligent accessory shoe  
Microphone (optional)  
94  
Au d io d u b b in g  
Du b b in g w it h t h e AUDIO/VIDEO ja ck  
Audio equipment  
LINE OUT  
L
R
AUDIO L  
White  
AUDIO R  
Red  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
Do not connect the  
video (yellow) plug.  
: Signal flow  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
Du b b in g w it h t h e b u ilt -in m icro p h o n e  
No connection is necessary.  
Note  
When dubbing with the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack or the built-in microphone, pictures are  
not output through the S VIDEO jack or the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack. Check the recorded  
picture on the screen. You can check the recorded sound by using headphones.  
If you make all the connections  
The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order:  
MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack  
Intelligent accessory shoe  
AUDIO/ VIDEO jack  
Built-in microphone  
95  
Au d io d u b b in g  
Ad d in g a u d io o n a re co rd e d t a p e  
Choose a connection described on the previous pages, and connect audio equipment or  
microphone to your camcorder. Then follow the procedure below.  
(1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(3) Locate the recording start point by pressing N. Then press X at the point  
where you want to start recording to set your camcorder to the playback pause  
mode.  
(4) Press AUDIO DUB . The green  
X indicator appears on screen.  
(5) Press X on your camcorder and start playing back the audio you want to  
record at the same time.  
The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. During  
recording new sound, the red  
appears on the screen.  
(6) Press x on your camcorder at the point where you want to stop recording.  
AUDIO DUB  
To add audio more precisely  
Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to  
stop recording later in the playback mode.  
Carry out steps 3 to 5. Recording automatically stops at the point where ZERO SET  
MEMORY was pressed.  
Mo n it o rin g t h e n e w re co rd e d so u n d  
(1) Play back the tape on which you added audio.  
(2) Press MENU, then select AUDIO MIX in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 178).  
VCR SET  
HiFi SOUND  
AUDIO MIX  
A / V DV OUT ST1  
RETURN  
ST2  
[
] :  
MENU END  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the balance between the original  
sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2), then press the dial.  
Five minutes after you disconnect the power supply or remove the battery  
pack, the AUDIO MIX setting returns to original sound (ST1) only. The default  
setting is original sound only.  
96  
Au d io d u b b in g  
Notes  
New audio cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the 16-bit mode (32 kHz,  
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz).  
New audio cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the LP mode.  
You cannot add audio with the DV IN/ OUT jack.  
You cannot add audio on the blank portion of the tape.  
If an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) is connected to your camcorder  
You cannot add audio to a recorded tape.  
We recommend that you add audio on a tape recorded w ith your camcorder  
If you add audio on a tape recorded with another camcorder, the sound quality may  
become worse.  
If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock  
You cannot record on a tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.  
97  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le  
If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can superimpose the title. When  
you play back the tape, the title is displayed for five seconds from the point  
where you superimposed it.  
VACATION  
(1) In the recording, standby mode, playback or playback pause, press MENU,  
then select TITLE in  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
, then press the dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial.  
The title flashes.  
(4) Change the color, size, or position, if necessary.  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select COLOR, SIZE or POSITION, then  
press the dial. The selected item appears.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the  
dial.  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.  
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.  
In the recording, playback or playback pause mode:  
The TITLE SAVE indicator appears on the screen for five seconds and the title  
is set.  
In the standby mode:  
The TITLE indicator appears. When you press START/ STOP to start  
recording, TITLE SAVE appears on the screen for five seconds, and the title is  
set.  
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
2
3
4
VACATION  
THE END  
VACATION  
THE END  
RETURN  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
TITLE  
VACATION  
VACATION  
THE END  
RETURN  
[
] :  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
EXEC SAVE MENU END  
SIZE  
SMALL  
TITLE  
MENU  
SIZE  
LARGE  
VACATION  
VACATION  
[
] :  
[
] :  
EXEC SAVE MENU END  
98  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le  
If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock  
You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write  
protection.  
To use a custom title  
If you want to use a custom title, select  
in step 2.  
If the tape has a blank portion  
You cannot superimpose a title on the portion.  
If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The title may not be displayed correctly.  
Titles superimposed w ith your camcorder  
Titles are displayed by only the DV  
format video equipment with an index titler  
function.  
The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when  
searching a recording with other video equipment.  
If the tape has too many index signals  
You may not be able to superimpose a title because the cassette memory becomes full.  
In this case, delete unwanted titles.  
To not display titles  
Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p. 181).  
Title setting  
The title color changes as follows:  
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE  
The title size changes as follows:  
SMALL y LARGE  
You cannot input 13 characters or more for a LARGE size. If you input more than 12  
characters, the title size returns to SMALL even if you select LARGE.  
If you select the title size SMALL, you have nine choices for the title position.  
If you select the title size LARGE, you have eight choices for the title position.  
One cassette can have up to about 20 titles, w ith each title comprising five  
characters  
However, if the cassette memory is full with date, photo and cassette label data, one  
cassette can have only up to about 11 titles each comprising five characters.  
Cassette memory capacity is as follows:  
Six date data (maximum)  
12 photo data (maximum)  
One cassette label (maximum)  
If the “  
FULLmark appears  
The cassette memory is full. Erase unwanted titles.  
99  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le  
Era sin g a t it le  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.  
(2) Press MENU, then select TITLEERASE in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 181).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the title you want to erase, then press  
the dial.  
ERASE OK ? indicator appears.  
(4) Make sure that the title is the one you want to erase, and turn the SEL/ PUSH  
EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes to EXECUTE.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
ERASING flashes on the screen. When the title is erased, COMPLETE is  
displayed.  
2
CM SET  
TITLE  
TITLE ERASE  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
RETURN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
HELLO !  
CONGRATULATIONS !  
HAPPY NEW YEAR !  
PRESENT  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
3
TITLE ERASE  
TITLE ERASE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
HELLO !  
4
PRESENT  
CONGRATULATIONS !  
HAPPY NEW YEAR !  
PRESENT  
ERASE OK ? RETURN  
OK  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
To ca n ce l e ra sin g a t it le  
Select RETURN in step 4 or 5.  
100  
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s  
You can make up to two titles and store them in the memory of your camcorder. Each  
title can have up to 20 characters.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR. Press MENU, then select TITLE  
in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 181).  
, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET,  
then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,  
then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the  
dial.  
(6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have selected all characters and completed the  
title.  
(7) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
[SET], then press the dial.  
(8) Press MENU to make the title menu disappear.  
TITLE SET  
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
TITLE SET  
1
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
RETURN  
2
3
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
VACATION  
THE END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
TITLE SET  
TITLE SET  
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
RETURN  
––––––––––––––––––––  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
TITLE SET  
TITLE SET  
1
3
2
4
––––––––––––––––––––  
––––––––––––––––––––  
4
6
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
TITLE SET  
TITLE SET  
S
–––––––––––––––––––  
––––––––––––––––––––  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
101  
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s  
To ch a n g e a t it le yo u h a ve st o re d  
In step 3, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want  
to change, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select [C], then press the dial to delete the title. The last character is erased. Enter the  
new title as desired.  
If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters in the standby mode w hile a  
cassette in your camcorder  
The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in  
memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then to CAMERA, then  
proceed from step 1.  
We recommend setting the POWER switch to VCR or removing the cassette so that  
your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters.  
To delete the title  
Select [C]. The last character is erased.  
To enter a space  
Select [Z& ?!], then select the blank part.  
102  
La b e lin g a ca sse t t e  
If you use a cassette with cassette memory, you can label a cassette. Labels can  
consist of up to 10 characters and are stored in cassette memory. When you  
insert the labeled cassette and set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR, the  
label is displayed for about five seconds.  
(1) Insert the cassette you want to label.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.  
(3) Press MENU, then select TAPE TITLE in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 181). The tape title display appears.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,  
then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the  
dial.  
(6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you complete the label.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial.  
The label is stored in memory.  
(8) Press MENU to erase the menu display.  
MENU  
TAPE T I TLE  
TAPE T I TLE  
CM SET  
3
4-6  
TITLE  
READY  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
E
CM SET  
TITLE  
TITLEERASE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
TITLE DSPL  
[
M
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
E
TAPE T I TLE  
TAPE T I TLE  
TAPE T I TLE  
M
[
M
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
103  
La b e lin g a ca sse t t e  
To e ra se t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e  
In step 4 turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial. The last  
character is erased.  
To ch a n g e t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e  
Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way to make a new label.  
If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock  
You cannot label the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.  
If the tape has too many index signals  
You may not be able to label a cassette because the memory becomes full. In this case,  
delete data you do not need.  
If you have superimposed titles in the cassette  
When the label is displayed, up to four titles also appear.  
When the -----indicator has few er than 10 spaces  
The cassette memory is full.  
-----indicates the number of characters you can select for the label.  
To erase the character  
Press [C]. The last character is erased.  
To enter a space  
Select [Z& ?!], then select the blank part.  
Era sin g a ll t h e d a t a in ca sse t t e m e m o ry  
You can erase all the data in cassette memory at once.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.  
(2) Press MENU, then select ERASE ALL in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 181).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes  
to EXECUTE.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
ERASING flashes on the screen. When all the data is erased, COMPLETE is  
displayed.  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g  
Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC in step 3 or 4.  
104  
— “ Me m o ry St ickOp e ra t io n s —  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can easily record and playback images on the Memory Sticksupplied with your  
camcorder. You can also do the following operations:  
Reading the image from the tape to the Memory Stickor from the Memory Stick”  
to the tape  
Importing images recorded on your camcorder to your computer  
Deleting images, protecting images, placing a print mark onto images  
On file fo rm a t  
Still image (JPEG)  
Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG format (extension .jpg).  
Moving picture (MPEG)  
Your camcorder compresses picture data in MPEG format (extension .mpg).  
Typ ica l im a g e d a t a file n a m e  
Still image  
100-0001: This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
Dsc00001.jpg: This file name appears on the display of your personal computer.  
Moving picture  
MOV00001: This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
Mov00001.mpg: This file name appears on the display of your personal computer.  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick”  
Terminal  
Write-protect tab  
Labeling position  
You cannot record or erase images when the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick”  
is set to LOCK.  
The position and shape of the write-protect tab may be different depending on the  
model.  
We recommend backing up important data on the hard disk of your computer.  
Image data may be damaged in the following cases:  
If you eject the Memory Stickor turn the power off during reading or writing.  
If you use Memory Sticks near static electricity or magnetic fields.  
Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts  
of the terminal.  
Do not attach any other material than the supplied label on the labeling position.  
Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to Memory Sticks.  
Do not disassemble or modify Memory Sticks.  
Do not let Memory Sticks become wet.  
Do not use or keep Memory Sticks in locations that are:  
Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun  
Under direct sunlight  
Very humid or subject to corrosive gases  
When you carry or store a Memory Stick,put it in its case.  
105  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Me m o ry St icks fo rm a t t e d o n a co m p u t e r  
Memory Sticks formatted on Windows OS or Macintosh computers are not  
guaranteed compatible with your camcorder.  
Notes on image data compatibility  
Image data files recorded on Memory Sticks by your camcorder conform with the  
Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard established by the JEITA  
(Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). You cannot  
play back on your camcorder still images recorded on other equipment (DCR-  
TRV890E/ TRV900/ TRV900E or DSC-D700/ D770) that does not conform with this  
universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)  
If you cannot use the Memory Stickthat is used with other equipment, format it  
with this camcorder (p. 180). However, formatting erases all information on the  
Memory Stick.”  
• “Memory Stickand  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
All other product names mentioned here may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. TMand “®” are not mentioned in each  
case in this manual.  
In se rt in g a Me m o ry St ick”  
Insert a Memory Stickin the Memory Stickslot as far as it can go with the B mark  
facing as illustrated.  
Access lamp  
B mark  
Memory Stickslot  
Eje ct in g a Me m o ry St ick”  
Press the Memory Stickonce lightly.  
While the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data  
from the Memory Stickor recording the data on the Memory Stick.Do not turn the  
power off or eject the Memory Stick. Otherwise, the image data may become  
damaged.  
If “  
MEMORY STICK ERRORis displayed  
Reinsert the Memory Sticka few times. The Memory Stickmay be damaged if the  
indicator is still displayed. If this occurs, use another Memory Stick.”  
106  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Se le ct in g t h e st ill im a g e q u a lit y m o d e  
You can select the image quality mode in still image recording.  
The default setting is FINE. (DCR-TRV18 only).  
The default setting is SUPER FINE. (DCR-TRV25/ TRV27 only).  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then select STILL SET in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 179).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality, then press  
the dial.  
1
VCR  
LOCK  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
MENU  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
2
3
4
OFF  
QUALITY  
QUALITY  
SUPER FINE  
QUALITY  
STANDARD  
IMAGESIZE  
RETURN  
IMAGESIZE FINE  
RETURN  
IMAGESIZE  
RETURN  
STANDARD  
REMAIN  
REMAIN  
17  
5
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
107  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Im a g e q u a lit y se t t in g s  
Setting  
Meaning  
SUPER FINE (SFN)*  
This is the highest image quality in your camcorder.  
The number of still images you can record is less than  
in FINE mode. Super fine images are compressed to  
about 1/ 3.  
FINE (FINE)  
Use this mode when you want to record high quality  
images. Fine images are compressed to about 1/ 6.  
STANDARD (STD)  
This is the standard image quality in your camcorder.  
Standard images are compressed to about 1/ 10.  
Note  
In some cases, changing the image quality mode may not affect the image quality,  
depending on the type of images you are shooting.  
Differences in image quality mode  
Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored in memory. The  
memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the selected image quality  
mode and image size. Details are shown in the table below.  
1152 × 864 image size*  
Image quality  
SUPER FINE  
FINE  
Memory capacity  
About 600 KB  
About 300 KB  
About 200 KB  
STANDARD  
640 × 480 image size  
Image quality  
SUPER FINE*  
FINE  
Memory capacity  
About 190 KB  
About 100 KB  
About 60 KB  
STANDARD  
* DCR-TRV25/ TRV27 only  
Image quality mode indicator  
The image quality mode indicator is not displayed during playback.  
When you select image quality  
The number of images you can shoot in the currently selected image quality appears on  
the screen.  
108  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Se le ct in g t h e im a g e size  
Still images:  
DCR-TRV25/ TRV27: You can select either of two image sizes.  
1152 × 864 or 640 × 480 (When the POWER switch is set to  
CAMERA or VCR, the image size is automatically set to 640 ×  
480.)  
The default setting is 1152 × 864.  
640 × 480 only  
DCR-TRV18:  
Moving pictures:  
You can select either of two picture sizes.  
320 × 240 or 160 × 112  
The default setting is 320 × 240.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then select STILL SET (still image) or MOVIE SET (moving  
picture) in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 179).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image size, then press the  
dial.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
Still images*:  
1152  
320  
640  
160  
Moving pictures:  
STILL SET*  
MOVIE SET  
1
3
4
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
1152  
MEMORY SET  
MOVIE SET  
320  
VCR  
LOCK  
IMAGESIZE 320 × 240  
REMAIN 160 × 112  
RETURN  
OFF(CHG)  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE 1152 × 864  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
RETURN  
640 × 480  
REMAIN  
REMAIN  
17  
40sec  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
STILL SET*  
MOVIE SET  
MEMORY SET  
MOVIE SET  
IMAGESIZE 160 × 112  
REMAIN  
RETURN  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE 640 × 480  
RETURN  
REMAIN  
REMAIN  
56  
2min  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
* DCR-TRV25/ TRV27 only  
109  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Im a g e size se t t in g s  
Setting  
Meaning  
Indicator  
1152 × 864* Records 1152 × 864 still images.  
1152  
*
640 × 480  
320 × 240  
160 × 112  
Records 640 × 480 still images.  
640  
Records 320 × 240 moving pictures.  
Records 160 × 112 moving pictures.  
320  
160  
Ap p ro xim a t e n u m b e r o f st ill im a g e s yo u ca n re co rd o n a  
Me m o ry St ick”  
The number of images you can record varies depending on which image quality and  
image size you select and the complexity of the subject.  
Type of Memory Sticks  
Image quality Image size  
8MB  
16MB  
32MB  
64MB  
128MB  
(supplied)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
1152 × 864  
SUPER FINE*  
12 images  
40 images  
25 images  
51 images 100 images 205 images  
640 × 480  
80 images 160 images 325 images 650 images  
50 images 100 images 205 images 415 images  
1152 × 864* 25 images  
640 × 480  
1152 × 864* 37 images  
640 × 480 120 images 240 images 485 images 980 images 1970 images  
FINE  
80 images 160 images 325 images 650 images 1310 images  
74 images 150 images 300 images 600 images  
STANDARD  
Note*  
If you record a 1152 × 864 still image with your camcorder and attempt to play back the  
data file on another device that does not support this image size, the image might be  
displayed in a smaller size.  
* DCR-TRV25/ TRV27 only  
110  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Ap p ro xim a t e t im e o f m o vin g p ict u re s yo u ca n re co rd o n a  
Me m o ry St ick”  
The time of moving pictures you can record varies depending on which image size you  
select and the complexity of the subject.  
Type of Memory Sticks  
Image size  
8MB  
16MB  
32MB  
64MB  
128MB  
(supplied)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
1 min.  
20 sec.  
2 min.  
40 sec.  
5 min.  
20 sec.  
10 min.  
40 sec.  
21 min.  
20 sec.  
320 × 240  
5 min.  
20 sec.  
10 min.  
40 sec.  
21 min.  
20 sec.  
42 min.  
40 sec.  
85 min.  
20 sec.  
160 × 112  
The table shows approximate number of still images and times of moving pictures you  
can record on a Memory Stickformatted on your camcorder.  
111  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry  
St ick” – Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can record still images on Memory Sticks.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly. The green z mark (AE/ AF lock indicator)  
stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the image and focus are  
adjusted, being targeted for the middle of the image and are fixed. Recording  
does not start yet.  
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The still image displayed after shutter sounds.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears. The image  
when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the Memory Stick.”  
[a ][b ]  
2
50min  
SFN  
1 / 12  
1152  
PHOTO  
SFN  
50min  
1152  
3
1
PHOTO  
VCR  
LOCK  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
[a ]: Number of recorded images  
[b ]: Approximate number of images that can  
be recorded on the Memory Stick”  
Yo u ca n re co rd st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry St icks in t h e t a p e  
re co rd in g o r re co rd in g st a n d b y  
For more information, see page 43.  
112  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
The following functions do not work:  
Wide mode  
Digital zoom  
SteadyShot  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Fader  
Picture effect  
Digital effect  
Title  
Sports lesson of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)  
While you are recording a still image  
You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
When you press PHOTO lightly in step 2  
The image momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction.  
Recording data  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed  
while recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto the Memory Stick.”  
To display the recording data, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during  
playback.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY (DCR-TRV25/TRV27 only)  
The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER  
switch is set to CAMERA.  
113  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Re co rd in g im a g e s co n t in u o u sly  
You can record still images continuously. Select one of the following modes in BURST  
in the menu settings before recording.  
NORMAL* [a ]  
Your camcorder shoots up to four still images in 1152 × 864 size or 13 still images in  
640 × 480 size at about 0.5 sec intervals. (  
)
EXP BRKTG (Exposure bracketing)*  
Your camcorder automatically shoots three images at about 0.5 sec intervals at different  
exposures. (  
)
MULTI SCRN (Multi screen) [b ]  
Your camcorder shoots nine still images at about 0.4 sec intervals and displays the  
images on a single page divided into nine boxes. Still images are recorded in 640 × 480  
size. (  
)
[a ]  
[b]  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then select STILL SET in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 179).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select BURST, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the  
dial.  
(5) Press MENU to make the menu setting disappear.  
(6) Press PHOTO deeper.  
* DCR-TRV25/ TRV27 only  
114  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
PHOTO  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
3
4
BURST  
OFF  
OFF  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE  
RETURN  
QUALITY  
NORMAL  
IMAGESIZE EXP BRKTG  
RETURN  
MULTI SCRN  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
MULTI SCRN  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
If t h e ca p a cit y o f t h e Me m o ry St ickb e co m e s fu ll  
FULLappears on the screen, and you cannot record a still image on this Memory  
Stick.”  
The number of images in continuous shooting  
The number of images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the image size  
and the capacity of the Memory Stick.”  
During recording images continuously  
The flash (optional) does not work.  
When shooting w ith the self-timer function or the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder automatically records up to the maximum recordable number of still  
images.  
When selecting NORMAL*  
Recording continues up to the maximum number of still images during pressing  
PHOTO deeper. Release PHOTO to stop recording.  
The effect of exposure bracketing (EXP BRKTG)*  
The effect may not appear clearly on the LCD screen. Checking images on a TV monitor  
or computer display for the expected effect is recommended.  
If there is space remaining on the Memory Stickfor less than three photos*  
You cannot carry out the exposure bracketing (EXP BRKTG). “  
FULLis displayed  
when you press PHOTO.  
* DCR-TRV25/ TRV27 only  
115  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Se lf-t im e r m e m o ry p h o t o re co rd in g  
You can record still images on Memory Sticks with the self-timer. You can also use  
the Remote Commander for this operation.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK is set to the left  
(unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then select SELFTIMER in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 177).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(4) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(5) Press PHOTO deeper.  
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of  
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.  
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
CAMERA SET  
SELFTIMER  
RETURN  
ON  
3
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r  
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings while your camcorder is in the standby  
mode. You cannot cancel self-timer with the Remote Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:  
Self-timer recording is finished.  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
116  
Re co rd in g a n im a g e fro m a t a p e a s a st ill  
im a g e  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a still  
image on a Memory Stick. Your camcorder can also capture moving picture data  
through the input connector and record it as a still image on a Memory Stick.  
Before operation  
Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press N. Moving picture recorded on the tape is played back.  
(3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the picture from the tape freezes.  
CAPTURE appears on the screen. Recording does not start yet. To change from  
the image selected to another image, release PHOTO once and press it lightly  
again.  
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on  
the Memory Stick.Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator  
disappears.  
1
2
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
3
4
CAPTURE  
TO  
TO  
O
O
H
H
P
P
Image size of still images  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
When the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or strike the unit. Also, do not turn the power off, eject a Memory Stick.  
Otherwise, image data may become damaged.  
If “ ” appears on the screen  
The inserted Memory Stickis incompatible with your camcorder because its format  
does not conform with your camcorder. Check the format of the Memory Stick.”  
117  
Re co rd in g a n im a g e fro m a t a p e a s a st ill im a g e  
If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback mode  
The cassette stops momentarily.  
Sound recorded on a tape  
You cannot record audio from a tape.  
Titles already recorded on cassettes  
You cannot record titles on Memory Sticks. Titles do not appear on the screen while  
you are recording a still image with PHOTO.  
Recording date/time  
The recording data (date/ time) when it is recorded on a Memory Stickis recorded.  
Various settings are not recorded. Data codes recorded on a tape cannot be recorded on  
a Memory Stick.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.  
The image of the external equipment is displayed on the screen.  
(3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 117.  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
OUT  
Yellow  
S VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
TV  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
VCR  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video jack on the VCR or  
the TV.  
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
TV or VCR.  
118  
Re co rd in g a n im a g e fro m a t a p e a s a st ill im a g e  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
DV IN/OUT  
DV  
DV OUT  
: Signal flow  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
Note  
In the following instances, recording is interrupted or “  
REC ERRORis displayed.  
When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has  
been repeatedly used for dubbing  
When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception  
when a TV tuner unit is in use  
119  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e  
Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on the Memory Stickon the  
moving picture you are recording. You can record the superimposed images on a tape  
or a Memory Stick.(However, you can record only superimposed still images on the  
Memory Stick.)  
M. CHROM (Memory chroma key):  
You can swap a blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a  
moving picture.  
M. LUMI (Memory luminance key):  
You can swap a brighter area of a still image such as a handwritten illustration or title  
with a moving picture. Record a title on the Memory Stickbefore a trip or event for  
convenience.  
C. CHROM (Camera chroma key):  
You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image such as an image that can be  
used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the  
moving picture will be swapped with a still image.  
M. OVERLAP* (Memory overlap):  
You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image recorded on the Memory  
Stickas the overlap function.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
Moving picture  
M. CHROM  
Blue  
Still image  
M. LUMI  
Still image  
Still image  
Moving picture  
C. CHROM  
Blue  
Moving picture  
M. OVERLAP*  
* The superimposed image using Memory overlap function can be recorded on tapes  
only.  
120  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a t a p e  
Before operation  
Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickwith recorded still images into your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Press MEMORY MIX.  
The last recorded or last composed image appears on the lower part of the  
screen as a thumbnail image.  
(3) Press MEMORY / + to select the still image you want to superimpose.  
MEMORY : To display the previous image  
MEMORY + : To display the following image  
(4) Select the desired mode with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The mode changes as follows:  
M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM y M. OVERLAP  
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.  
M. CHROM Blue chroma key (blue background) to extract a still image  
and superimpose it on a moving picture  
M. LUMI  
Brightness level used when extracting a still image and  
superimposing it on a moving picture  
C. CHROM Blue chroma key (blue background) to extract a moving  
picture and superimpose it on a still image  
M. OVERLAP No adjustment necessary  
The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.  
(7) Press START/ STOP to start recording.  
121  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
MEMORY  
MIX  
2
6
M. CHROM  
3
1000021  
Still image  
4
5
M. LUMI  
M. LUMI III•••  
M. LUMI I•••••  
1000021  
1000021  
1000021  
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o su p e rim p o se  
Do either of the following:  
Press MEMORY / + before step 6.  
Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 4.  
(except for M. OVERLAP)  
To ch a n g e t h e m o d e se t t in g  
Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 4.  
(except for M. OVERLAP)e  
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX  
Press MEMORY MIX.  
Notes  
You cannot use the MEMORY MIX function for moving pictures recorded on  
Memory Sticks.  
When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of  
the picture may not be clear.  
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment  
You may not be able to play back modified images with your camcorder.  
When you select M. OVERLAP  
You cannot change the still image or the mode setting.  
During recording  
You cannot change the mode setting.  
To record the superimposed image as a still image  
Press PHOTO deeper in step 7.  
Before operation, select PHOTO REC in  
to TAPE in the menu settings (p. 177).  
122  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St icka s a st ill  
im a g e  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickincluding still images into your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MEMORY MIX.  
The last recorded or composed image appears on the lower part of the screen.  
(3) Press MEMORY / + to select the image you want to superimpose.  
MEMORY : To display the previous image  
MEMORY + : To display the following image  
(4) Select the desired mode with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The mode changes as follows:  
M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM  
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.  
M. CHROM Blue chroma key (blue background) to extract a still image  
and superimpose it on a moving picture  
M. LUMI  
Brightness level used when extracting a still image and  
superimposing it on a moving picture  
C. CHROM Blue chroma key (blue background) to extract a moving  
picture and superimpose it on a still image  
The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.  
(7) Press PHOTO deeper to start recording.  
The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a Memory Stick.”  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
123  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
MEMORY  
MIX  
2
M. CHROM  
3
1000021  
Still image  
4
5
6
M. LUMI  
M. LUMI III•••  
M. LUMI I•••••  
1000021  
1000021  
1000021  
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o su p e rim p o se  
Do either of the following:  
Press MEMORY / + before step 6.  
Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 4.  
To ch a n g e t h e m o d e se t t in g  
Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step 6, and repeat the procedure from step 4.  
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX  
Press MEMORY MIX.  
Notes  
You cannot use the MEMORY MIX function for moving pictures recorded on  
Memory Sticks.  
When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of  
the picture may not be clear.  
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment  
You may not be able to play back modified images with your camcorder.  
During recording  
You cannot change the mode setting.  
When recording images on a Memory Stickusing the MEMORY MIX function  
The PROGRAM AE function does not work. (The indicator flashes.)  
The Memory Sticksupplied w ith your camcorder is already stored w ith 20  
images  
For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame) 100-0001 to 100-0018  
For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 100-0019 to 100-0020  
Sample images  
Sample images stored in the Memory Sticksupplied with your camcorder are  
protected (p. 148).  
124  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a Me m o ry  
St ick” – MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can record moving pictures with sound on Memory Sticks.  
The picture and sound are recorded up to the capacity of Memory Stick. (MPEG  
MOVIE EX)  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press START/ STOP.  
Your camcorder starts recording. The camera recording lamp located on the  
front of your camcorder lights up. Picture and sound are recorded up to the  
remaining capacity of the Memory Stick.For more information about  
recording time, see page 111.  
1
VCR  
LOCK  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
:
50min  
320REC0:00 00  
2
15min  
[a ]  
BBB  
[b ]  
[a ]: The recording time that can be recorded on the Memory Stick”  
[b ]: This indicator is displayed for five seconds after pressing START/ STOP. This  
indicator is not recorded.  
To st o p re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP.  
Note  
Sound is recorded in monaural.  
125  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
The following functions do not work:  
Wide mode  
Digital zoom  
SteadyShot  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Fader  
Picture effect  
Digital effect  
Title  
Sports lesson of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)  
Recording date/time  
The date/ time are not displayed while recording. However, they are automatically  
recorded onto the Memory Stick.”  
To display the recording date/ time, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander  
during playback. Various settings cannot be recorded.  
During recording on a Memory Stick”  
Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. During ejecting the tape, sound is  
recorded on the Memory Stick.”  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY (DCR-TRV25/TRV27 only)  
The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER  
switch is set to CAMERA.  
126  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
Se lf-t im e r MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
You can record moving pictures on Memory Sticks with the self-timer. You can also  
use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK is set to the left  
(unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then select SELFTIMER in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(4) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(5) Press START/ STOP.  
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of  
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.  
START/STOP  
CAMERA SET  
SELFTIMER  
RETURN  
ON  
START/  
STOP  
3
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n  
Press START/ STOP. To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.  
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r  
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings in the standby mode. You cannot cancel  
self-timer with the Remote Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:  
Self-timer recording is finished.  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
127  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a  
m o vin g p ict u re  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a  
moving picture on a Memory Stick.Your camcorder can also capture moving picture  
data through the input connector and record it as a moving picture on a Memory  
Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press N. The picture recorded on the tape is played back. And press X at the  
scene where you want to start recording from.  
(3) Press START/ STOP on your camcorder. Picture and sound are recorded up to  
the remaining capacity of the Memory Stick.For more information about  
recording time, see page 111.  
1
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
:
:
:
50min  
N
320REC  
0 15 42 22  
3
:
0 00:00  
15min  
[a ]  
PLAY  
PAUSE  
BBB  
2
[b ]  
[a ]: The recording time that can be recorded on  
the Memory Stick”  
[b ]: This indicator is displayed for  
five seconds after pressing START/ STOP.  
This indicator is not recorded.  
To st o p re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP.  
128  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Notes  
Sound recorded in 48 kHz is converted to 32 kHz sound when recording images from  
a tape to Memory Sticks.  
Sound recorded in stereo is converted to monaural sound when recording from a tape.  
When the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock the unit. Also, do not turn the power off or eject a Memory  
Stick. Otherwise, image data may become damaged.  
Titles already recorded on cassettes  
You cannot record titles onto Memory Sticks. Titles do not appear while you are  
recording moving pictures with START/ STOP.  
Recording date/time  
The recording data (date/ time) when it is recorded on a Memory Stickis recorded.  
Various settings are not recorded. Data codes recorded on a tape cannot be recorded on  
a Memory Stick.  
If “  
AUDIO ERRORis displayed  
Sound that cannot be recorded by your camcorder has been recorded. Connect the A/ V  
connecting cable to input images from external equipment used to play back the imag  
(p. 130).  
129  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Play back the recorded tape on the VCR, or turn the TV on to see the desired  
program.  
The image of the other equipment is displayed on the screen.  
(3) Follow step 3 on page 128 at the point where you want to start recording from.  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
Yellow  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
TV  
AUDIO  
VCR  
Red  
White  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
TV or VCR.  
130  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
DV IN/OUT  
DV  
DV OUT  
: Signal flow  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
Note  
In the following instances, recording is interrupted or “  
REC ERRORis displayed  
and you cannot record pictures.  
When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has  
been repeatedly used for dubbing  
When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception  
when a TV tuner unit is in use  
When the input signal is cut off.  
131  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s  
a m o vin g p ict u re Dig it a l p ro g ra m  
e d it in g (o n Me m o ry St icks)  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto Memory Sticks.  
Ma kin g t h e p ro g ra m  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(2) Insert the tape for playback, and a Memory Stickfor recording into your  
camcorder.  
(3) Press MENU, then select VIDEO EDIT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 184).  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MEMORY, then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE and select the desired  
image size, then press the dial.  
(6) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
operation buttons, then pause playback.  
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MARK, then press the dial.  
The IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark  
changes to light blue.  
(8) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
operation buttons, then pause playback.  
(9) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(10) Repeat steps 6 to 9, then set the program.  
When one program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.  
You can set 20 programs in maximum.  
6,8  
STOP  
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
PAUSE  
MENU  
7
9
10  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
OUT  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 58 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 10 01 23  
1
2
IN  
4
IN  
UNDO  
UNDO  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
IMAGESIZE  
ERASE ALL  
START  
IMAGESIZE  
ERASE ALL  
START  
IMAGESIZE  
:
0
:
:
1
:
:
3
:
TOTAL 0 00 00  
SCENE  
TOTAL 0 00 03  
SCENE  
TOTAL 0 00 13  
SCENE  
2min  
2min  
2min  
320  
320  
320  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
132  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n Me m o ry St icks)  
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t  
Erase OUT first and then IN from of the last program.  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.  
To cancel erasing  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial in step 2.  
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings,  
then select MEMORY with the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then select EXECUTE  
with the dial.  
All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.  
To cancel erasing all programs  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN with the dial in step 2.  
To cancel a program you have set  
Press MENU.  
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.  
Notes  
You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or the contents of cassette memory.  
You cannot operate recording during the Digital program editing on Memory  
Sticks.  
On a blank portion of the tape  
You cannot set IN or OUT.  
If there is a blank portion betw een IN and OUT on the tape  
The total time code may not be displayed correctly.  
During making a program  
If you eject the cassette, NOT READY appears on the screen. The program will be  
erased.  
133  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n Me m o ry St icks)  
Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g a Me m o ry St ick)  
(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select MEMORY, then press the dial.  
(2) Select START in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing.  
The program mark flashes.  
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, the EDITING indicator appears  
during writing of data on your camcorder, and REC appears during dubbing  
on the screen.  
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing is complete.  
When the dubbing ends, your camcorder automatically stops.  
To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g  
Press x using the video operation buttons.  
The program you made is recorded on a Memory Stickup to the place where you  
pressed x.  
To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g fu n ct io n  
Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to  
VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings.  
Press MENU to end the Digital program editing function.  
NOT READY appears on the LCD screen w hen:  
The program to operate the Digital program editing has not been made.  
The Memory Stickis not inserted.  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK.  
When Memory Stickdoes not have enough space to record  
LOW MEMORY appears on the screen. However, you can record pictures up to the  
time indicated.  
134  
Co p yin g st ill im a g e s fro m a t a p e  
PHOTO SAVE  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Using the search function, you can automatically capture only still images from tapes  
and record them on a Memory Stickin sequence.  
Before operation  
Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder and rewind the tape.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu. Select PHOTO SAVE in  
with SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial (p. 180). PHOTO BUTTON appears on the screen.  
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The still images from the tape are recorded on the  
Memory Stick.The number of still images copied is displayed. END is  
displayed when copying ends.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
PHOTO SAVE  
0 00 00 00  
PHOTO SAVE  
0 30 00 00  
3
2
4/15  
640STD  
8/15  
640STD  
SAVING  
END  
0
4
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
PHOTO  
:
:
:
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
PHOTO SAVE READY  
FILE NO.  
RETURN  
PHOTO SAVE  
0 00 00 00  
4/15  
640STD  
PHOTO BUTTON  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
] :  
PHOTO START MENU END  
MENU  
To st o p co p yin g  
Press MENU or x.  
Wh e n t h e Me m o ry St ickb e co m e s fu ll  
MEMORY FULL appears on the screen, and copying stops. Insert another Memory  
Stickand repeat the procedure from step 2.  
135  
Co p yin g st ill im a g e s fro m a t a p e PHOTO SAVE  
Image size of still images  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
When the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock your camcorder. As well do not turn the power off or eject a  
Memory Stick. Otherwise, image data may become damaged.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
NOT READY appears when you select the item in the menu settings.  
When you change Memory Sticks during copying  
Your camcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous  
Memory Stick.”  
136  
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s  
Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can play back still images recorded on a Memory Stick.You can also play back  
six images including moving pictures in order at a time by selecting the index screen.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.  
(3) Press MEMORY / + to select the desired still image.  
MEMORY : To display the previous image  
MEMORY + : To display the following image  
1
VCR  
LOCK  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
2
3
PLAY  
To st o p m e m o ry p h o t o p la yb a ck  
Press MEMORY PLAY.  
Note  
You may not be able to play back images with your camcorder:  
when playing back image data modified on your computers.  
when playing back image data shot with other equipment.  
Notes on the file name  
The directory number may not be displayed and only the file name may be displayed  
if the structure of the directory does not conform to the DCF standard.  
• “  
- DIRECTORY ERRORmay appear on the screen if the structure of the  
directory does not conform to the DCF standard. While this message appears, you can  
play back images but cannot record them on the Memory Stick.”  
The file name flashes on the screen if the file is corrupted or the file is unreadable.  
137  
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
To play back recorded images on a TV screen  
Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable supplied with your  
camcorder before operation.  
When operating memory photo playback on a TV or on the LCD screen, the image  
quality may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is  
as good as ever.  
Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be  
output from the TV speakers.  
When no image is recorded on the Memory Stick”  
The message “  
NO FILEappears.  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g st ill im a g e p la yb a ck  
Image size*  
Image number/ Total number of recorded  
images  
6/100  
MEMORY PLAY  
640  
1000006  
Print mark  
Protect  
JUL 4 2002  
12:05:56 AM  
Recording date/ time/ various settings  
Data Directory Number, File Number  
*DCR-TRV25/ TRV27 only  
Recording data  
You can view the recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) by  
pressing DATA CODE on the Remote Commander.  
138  
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
Pla yin g b a ck six re co rd e d im a g e s a t a t im e (in d e x scre e n )  
You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when  
searching for a particular image.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MEMORY INDEX to display the index screen.  
1
2
VCR  
LOCK  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
INDEX  
A red B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index  
screen mode.  
MEMORY : To display the previous six images  
MEMORY + : To display the following six images  
1
4
2
5
3
6
B mark  
100-0006  
6/100  
To re t u rn t o t h e n o rm a l p la yb a ck scre e n (sin g le scre e n )  
Press MEMORY / + to move the B mark to the image you want to display on full  
screen, then press MEMORY PLAY.  
Note  
When displaying the index screen, the number appears above each image. This  
indicates the order in which images are recorded on the Memory Stick.These  
numbers are different from the data file names (p. 105).  
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment  
These files are sometimes not displayed on the index screen.  
139  
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s  
MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can play back moving pictures recorded on a Memory Stick.You can also play  
back six images including still images in order at a time by selecting the index screen.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.  
(3) Press MEMORY / + to select the desired moving pictures.  
MEMORY : To display the previous image  
MEMORY + : To display the following image  
(4) Press MPEG N X or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to start playback.  
(5) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.  
: To turn the volume down  
+ : To turn the volume up  
2
4
1
VCR  
LOCK  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
PLAY  
3
MPEG  
To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Press MPEG N X or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
Note  
You may not be able to play back images properly in the following cases:  
When playing back on your camcorder image data modified on your computer  
When playing back image data on other equipment.  
To play back recorded pictures on a TV screen  
Before operation, connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder.  
Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be  
output from the TV speakers.  
When no image is recorded on the Memory Stick”  
The message “  
NO FILEappears.  
140  
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Pla yin g b a ck a m o vin g p ict u re fro m t h e d e sire d p a rt  
The moving picture recorded on a Memory Stickis divided into 23 parts.  
You can select any point and playback the picture.  
(1) Follow steps 1 to 3 on page 140.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and select the point where you want to start  
playback, then press the dial.  
R : To see the next part  
r : To see the previous part  
As you turn the dial to select the playback scene you want, the bar and counter  
change to indicate the playback point.  
50min  
MOV00001  
2/20  
0:00:50  
320  
–––  
–––  
(3) Press MPEG N X or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to start playback.  
(4) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.  
: To turn the volume down  
+ : To turn the volume up  
To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Press MPEG N X or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
When recording time is not long  
The moving picture may not be divided into 23 parts.  
141  
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g m o vin g p ict u re p la yb a ck  
Image size  
Picture number/ Total number of recorded  
pictures  
50min  
MOV00001  
2/20  
0:00:50  
320  
–––  
Protect  
–––  
JUL 4 2002  
12:05:56 AM  
Recording date/ time  
(Various settings are displayed as “– – –”.)  
Data directory number/ File number  
Recording date/time  
Recording date/ time are displayed when you press the DATA CODE button on the  
Remote Commander. Various settings are not recorded.  
142  
Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n Me m o ry  
St icks t o a t a p e  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can copy images recorded on Memory Stickand record them to a tape.  
Before operation  
Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Using the video control buttons, search a point where you want to record the  
desired image. Set the tape to playback pause mode.  
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder.  
The tape is set to the recording pause mode.  
(4) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.  
(5) Press MEMORY / + to select the desired image.  
MEMORY : To display the previous image  
MEMORY + : To display the following image  
(6) Press X to start recording and press X again to stop.  
z appears on the screen during recording.  
(7) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 5 and 6.  
1
5
4
3
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
PLAY  
zX  
REC  
To st o p co p yin g in t h e m id d le  
Press x.  
143  
Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n Me m o ry St icks t o a t a p e  
During copying  
You cannot operate the following buttons:  
MEMORY PLAY  
MEMORY INDEX  
MEMORY DELETE  
MEMORY / +  
MEMORY MIX  
Note on the index screen  
You cannot record the index screen.  
If you press EDITSEARCH during pause mode  
Memory playback stops.  
Image data modified on computers or shot w ith other equipment  
You may not be able to copy modified images with your camcorder.  
If you press DISPLAY during recording or in the recording standby mode  
You can see the memory playback and file name indicators in addition to the time code  
indicator and other tape-related indicators.  
When copying movies  
After step 6, press the MPEG u button or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and play back the  
image.  
144  
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n a  
Me m o ry St ick” – Me m o ry PB ZOOM  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can enlarge still images recorded on a Memory Stick.You can select and view a  
desired part from the enlarged still image. Also, you can copy the desired part of the  
enlarged still image to tapes or Memory Sticks.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) In the memory playback mode, press PB ZOOM on your camcorder.  
The center of the image is enlarged to about twice its size, and  
on the screen.  
appear  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the  
dial.  
R : The image moves downwards.  
r : The image moves upwards.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the  
dial.  
: The image moves leftward. (Turn the dial upwards.)  
: The image moves rightward. (Turn the dial downwards.)  
t
T
(5) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.  
You can enlarge the image from about 1.1 times up to five times its size.  
W : Decreases the zoom ratio.  
T : Increases the zoom ratio.  
PB ZOOM  
× 5.0  
5
1
VCR  
LOCK  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
T
[
] :  
EXEC T t  
W
2
4
PB  
ZOOM  
3
PB ZOOM  
× 2.0  
1/6  
PB ZOOM  
× 2.0  
1/6  
MEMORY PLAY  
MEMORY PLAY  
[
] :  
EXEC T t  
[
] :  
EXEC r R  
To ca n ce l PB ZOOM m o d e  
Press PB ZOOM.  
145  
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry PB ZOOM  
The PB ZOOM mode is canceled w hen the follow ing buttons are pressed:  
MENU  
MEMORY PLAY  
MEMORY INDEX  
MEMORY / +  
Moving pictures recorded on Memory Sticks  
The PB ZOOM mode does not work.  
To record the still image processed by Memory PB ZOOM on Memory Sticks  
Press the PHOTO button to record the still image processed by PB ZOOM. (Images are  
recorded at 640 × 480 size.)  
To copy the still image processed by Memory PB ZOOM to a tape  
See page 143.  
146  
Pla yin g b a ck im a g e s in a co n t in u o u s lo o p  
SLIDE SHOW  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially  
when checking recorded images or during a presentation.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu. Select SLIDE SHOW in  
with the SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial (p. 180).  
(3) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the  
Memory Stickin sequence.  
3
PLAY  
MENU  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
SLIDE SHOW  
1000001  
1/100  
640  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
SLIDE SHOW READY  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
2
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
] :  
M
PLAY START MENU END  
To st o p t h e slid e sh o w  
Press MENU.  
To p a u se d u rin g a slid e sh o w  
Press MEMORY PLAY.  
To st a rt t h e slid e sh o w fro m a p a rt icu la r im a g e  
Select the desired image using MEMORY / + buttons before step 2.  
To view recorded images on TV  
Before operation, connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder.  
If you change the Memory Stickduring operation  
The slide show function does not operate. If you change the Memory Stick,be sure to  
follow the steps again from the beginning.  
147  
Pre ve n t in g a ccid e n t a l e ra su re  
Im a g e p ro t e ct io n  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can protect selected images to prevent accidental erasure of important images.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Play back the image you want to protect.  
(3) Press MENU, then select PROTECT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 180).  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(5) Press MENU to make the menu display disappear. The -mark is  
displayed.  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
10/12  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
10/12  
3
4
OFF  
ON  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
SLIDE SHOW OFF  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
SLIDE SHOW OFF  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
10/12  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
10/12  
MENU  
ON  
ON  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
To ca n ce l im a g e p ro t e ct io n  
Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial. The -indicator  
disappears.  
Note  
Formatting erases all information on the Memory Stick,including the protected  
image data. Before formatting a Memory Stick, check its contents.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
You cannot protect images.  
148  
De le t in g im a g e s DELETE  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can delete images stored in a Memory Stick.”  
You can delete all images or only selected images.  
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Play back the image you want to delete.  
(3) Press MEMORY DELETE. DELETE?appears on the screen.  
(4) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The selected image is deleted.  
1
VCR  
LOCK  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
10/100  
DELETE  
1000010  
3,4  
DELETE?  
DELETE  
[
]
:
[]  
:
DELETE DEL  
CANCEL  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e  
Press MEMORY in step 4.  
To d e le t e a n im a g e d isp la ye d o n t h e in d e x scre e n  
Press MEMORY / + to move the B indicator to the image and follow steps 3 and 4.  
Notes  
To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection.  
Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Before deleting an image, carefully  
check the image.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
You cannot delete images.  
149  
De le t in g im a g e s DELETE  
De le t in g a ll im a g e s  
You can delete all unprotected images in a Memory Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then select DELETE ALL in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 180).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes  
to EXECUTE.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
DELETING flashes on the screen. When all unprotected images are deleted,  
COMPLETE is displayed.  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
2
3
4
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL READY  
FORMAT  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL RETURN  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL RETURN  
DELETE ALL RETURN  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
OK  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL DELETING  
FORMAT  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL COMPLETE  
FORMAT  
MENU  
RETURN  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a ll t h e im a g e s in t h e Me m o ry St ick”  
Select RETURN in step 3 or 4, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
While DELETING appears  
Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons.  
150  
Writ in g a p rin t m a rk PRINT MARK  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can specify a recorded still image to print out by putting marks. This function is  
useful for printing out still images later.  
Your camcorder conforms to the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for  
specifying still images to print out.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Play back the image you want to write a print mark.  
(3) Press MENU, then select PRINT MARK in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 180).  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(5) Press MENU to make the menu display disappear. The  
mark is displayed  
beside the image with a print mark.  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
10/12  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
10/12  
3
4
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
MENU  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PRINT MARK ON  
PROTECT  
SLIDE SHOW  
FILE NO.  
10/12  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
MENU END  
[
] :  
To ca n ce l w rit in g o f p rin t m a rks  
Select OFF in step 4, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The mark disappears from the image.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
You cannot write print marks on still images.  
Moving pictures  
You cannot write print marks on moving pictures.  
While the file name is flashing  
You cannot write the print mark on images.  
151  
Usin g t h e o p t io n a l p rin t e r  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
You can use the optional printer on your camcorder to print images on print paper.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.  
There are various ways of printing still images. The following, however, describes the  
setup for print settings by selecting  
in the menu on your camcorder.  
Before operation  
Insert a recorded Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
Attach the optional printer to your camcorder as illustrated.  
Printer  
9PIC PRINT  
DATE/TIME  
PRINT SET  
9PIC PRINT  
DATE/TIME  
RETURN  
PRINT SET  
9PIC PRINT  
DATE/TIME  
RETURN  
RETURN  
SAME  
OFF  
MULTI  
DATE  
MARKED  
DAY&TIME  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
You can print nine still images on the 9-split print paper. Select the desired mode in the  
menu settings.  
SAME PICS  
MULTI PICS or MARKED PICS*  
* Nine still images with print marks are printed together.  
You can make prints with the recording date and/ or recording time. Select the desired  
mode in the menu settings.  
DATE  
DAY & TIME  
:
4 12 00AM  
JUL 4 2002  
152  
Usin g t h e o p t io n a l p rin t e r  
Images recorded in the multi screen mode  
You cannot print images recorded in the multi screen mode on sticker type print paper.  
Moving pictures recorded on a Memory Stick”  
You cannot print the images.  
When Memory Stickhas no files  
NO STILL IMAGE FILEappears on the screen.  
When there are no files w ith a PRINT MARK  
NO PRINT MARKappears on the screen.  
Images processed by 9PIC PRINT  
You cannot insert a DATE/ TIME indicator.  
153  
Vie w in g Im a g e s Usin g Yo u r Co m p u t e r —  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
In t ro d u ct io n  
There are following ways of connecting the camcorder to a computer in order to view  
images saved on a Memory Stick* or recorded on tape on your computer.  
*To view images on a computer which has a Memory Stick slot, first remove the  
Memory Stickfrom the camcorder and then insert it into the computers Memory  
Stick slot.  
Camcorder Connection  
jack  
Connection  
cable  
Computer environment  
requirements  
USB cable  
(supplied)  
USB jack,  
editing software  
USB jack  
DV jack  
Tape stills and  
movies  
i. LINK cable  
(DV connecting  
cable) (optional)  
DV jack,  
editing software  
Memory Stick*  
stills and movies  
USB cable  
(supplied)  
USB jack,  
editing software  
USB jack  
When connecting to a computer via the USB jack, complete installation of the  
USB driver beforehand. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first,  
you w ill not be able to install the USB driver correctly.  
For details about your computers jacks and editing software, contact the computer  
manufacturer.  
* Except DCR-TRV16  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
For more information, see page 157.  
(USB) jack  
USB jack  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
154  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r In t ro d u ct io n  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV  
co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
Your computer must have a DV jack and editing software installed that can read video  
signals.  
DV jack  
DV IN/  
OUT  
: Signal flow  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
There are two methods of USB connection, NORMAL and PTP. The default setting is  
NORMAL. Here we explain how to use the camcorder with NORMAL USB connection.  
See page 157 when using Windows and page 171 when using Macintosh.  
(USB) jack  
USB jack  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
You can also use a Memory Stick Reader/ Writer (optional).  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h o u t a USB ja ck  
Use an optional floppy disk adaptor for Memory Stick or a PC card adaptor for Memory  
Stick.  
When purchasing an accessory, check its catalog beforehand for the recommended  
operating environment.  
155  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r In t ro d u ct io n  
No t e s o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r  
Me m o ry St ick”  
• “Memory Stickoperations on your camcorder cannot be assured if a Memory Stick”  
formatted on your computer is used on your camcorder, or if the Memory Stickin  
your camcorder was formatted from your computer when the USB cable was  
connected.  
Do not compress the data on the Memory Stick.Compressed files cannot be played  
back on your camcorder.  
So ft w a re  
Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a  
still image file.  
When you load an image modified using retouching software from your computer to  
your camcorder or when you directly modify the image on your camcorder, the image  
format will differ so a file error indicator may appear and you may be unable to open  
the file.  
Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after  
recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.  
156  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r  
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Complete installation of the USB driver before connecting the camcorder to  
the computer. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not  
be able to install the USB driver correctly.  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to  
the computers USB jack. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied, along  
with the application software required for viewing images.  
If you connect your camcorder and your computer using the USB cable, you can view  
pictures live from your camcorder and pictures recorded on a tape on your computer  
(USB streaming function).  
Furthermore, if you download pictures from your camcorder to your computer, you can  
process or edit them in image processing software and append them to e-mail. You can  
view images recorded on a Memory Stickon your computer (except DCR-TRV16).  
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t t o vie w t a p e  
im a g e s o n t h e co m p u t e r  
OS:  
Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP  
Home Edition or Windows XP Professional.  
Standard installation is required.  
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.  
You cannot hear sound if your computer is running Windows 98, but you can read still  
images.  
CPU:  
Minimum 500 MHz Intel Pentium III or faster (800 MHz or faster recommended)  
Application:  
DirectX 8.0a or later  
Sound system:  
16 bit stereo sound card and stereo speakers  
Memory:  
64 MB or more  
Hard disk:  
Available memory required for installation:  
at least 200 MB  
Available hard disk memory recommended:  
at least 1 GB (depending on the size of the image files edited)  
Display:  
4 MB VRAM video card, Minimum 800 × 600 dot Hi color (16 bit color, 65 000 colors),  
Direct Draw display driver capability (At 800 × 600 dot or less, 256 colors and less, this  
product will not operate correctly.)  
Others:  
This product is compatible with DirectX technology, so it is necessary to install DirectX.  
The USB jack must be provided as standard.  
You cannot use this function in the Macintosh environment.  
157  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t t o vie w Me m o ry  
St ickim a g e s o n t h e co m p u t e r  
OS:  
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,  
Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional.  
Standard installation is required.  
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.  
CPU:  
MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster  
The USB jack must be provided as standard.  
Windows Media Player must be installed (to play back moving pictures).  
Notes  
Operations are not guaranteed for the Windows environment if you connect two or  
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.  
Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is  
used simultaneously.  
Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments  
mentioned above.  
Windows and Windows Media are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/ or other countries.  
Pentium is trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation.  
All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, TMand “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
158  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r  
Start the follow ing operation w ithout connecting the USB cable to your  
computer.  
Connect the USB cable according to Making the computer recognize the  
camcorder.  
If you are using Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Home Edition/  
Professional, log in with permission of Administrators.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The  
application software starts up and the title screen appears.  
(3) Move the cursor to USB Driverand click. This starts USB driver installation.  
(4) Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.  
(5) Remove the CD-ROM and then restart the computer, in accordance with the  
instructions on the screen.  
Note  
If you connect the USB cable before USB driver installation is complete, the USB driver  
will not be properly registered. Carry out installation again in accordance with the steps  
on page 162.  
Window s XP Home Edition/Professional users  
If you go to USBCONNECT in the menu settings and select PTP, you can copy  
Memory Stickimages from the camcorder onto your computer without installing the  
USB driver. This is ideal for simply copying images from a camcorder onto a computer.  
Refer to page 183 for details.  
159  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Ma kin g t h e co m p u t e r re co g n ize t h e ca m co rd e r  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e  
Refer to page 161 for details on viewing Memory Stickimages on your computer  
(except DCR-TRV16).  
You need to install PIXELA ImageMixer to view images recorded on a tape. Install it  
from the CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder.  
To install and use this software in Windows 2000 Professional, you must be authorized  
as Power Users or Administrators. For Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional, you  
must be authorized as Administrators.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
If you are using your computer, close all running applications.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
The application software starts up and the title screen appears. If the  
application software title screen does not appear, double-click My  
Computerand then ImageMixer(CD-ROM Drive). The application  
software screen appears after a while.  
(3) Move the cursor to PIXELA ImageMixerand click.  
The Install Wizard program starts up and the Select Settings Language”  
screen appears.  
(4) Select the language for installation.  
(5) Follow the on-screen messages.  
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.  
(6) Click DirectX.  
Follow the on-screen messages to install DirectX.  
When the installation of DirectX is complete, restart the computer.  
(7) Connect the AC power adaptor to your camcorder.  
(8) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(9) Select USB STREAM in  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 183).  
(10)With the CD-ROM inserted, connect the (USB) jack of the camcorder and  
computer using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.  
Your computer recognizes the camcorder, and the Windows Add Hardware  
Wizard starts.  
(USB) jack  
USB jack  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
160  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
(11)Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes  
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts  
three times because three different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow  
the installation to complete without interrupting it.  
For Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional users:  
(12)After the File Neededscreen appears.  
Open Browse...t My Computert ImageMixert Sonyhcb.sys,  
and click OK.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Before operation  
Set USBCONNECT in  
to NORMAL in the menu settings.  
(The default setting is NORMAL.)  
(1) Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(2) Connect the AC power adaptor and set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(3) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB jack on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
USB MODEappears on the LCD screen of your camcorder. Your computer  
recognizes the camcorder, and the Add Hardware Wizard starts.  
(USB) jack  
USB jack  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
(4) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes  
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts  
two times because two different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow  
each installation to complete without interrupting them.  
You cannot install the USB driver if a Memory Stickis not in your camcorder.  
Be sure to insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder before installing the USB  
driver.  
161  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
If yo u ca n n o t in st a ll t h e USB d rive r  
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your  
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Perform the following  
procedure to correctly install the USB driver.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e  
Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver  
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
2 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the POWER switch to VCR.  
3 Connect the USB jack on your computer to the (USB) jack on your camcorder  
using the USB cable supplied.  
4 Open your computers Device Manager.  
Window s XP Home Edition/Professional:  
Select Startt Control Panelt Systemt Hardware, and click the  
Device Managerbutton.  
If there is no Systeminside Pick a categoryafter clicking Control Panel,  
click Switch to classic viewinstead.  
Window s 2000 Professional:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt Systemt Hardwaretab,  
and click the Device Managerbutton.  
Window s 98SE/Window s Me:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt System, and click Device  
Manager.  
5 Select and delete the underlined devices.  
Window s 98SE  
Window s Me  
162  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Window s 2000 Professional  
Window s XP Home Edition/Professional  
6 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then  
disconnect the USB cable.  
7 Restart your computer.  
Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM  
Perform the entire procedure described in Installing the USB driveron page 159.  
163  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Step1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver  
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
2 Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
3 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
4 Connect the USB jack on your computer to the (USB) jack on your camcorder  
using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.  
5 Open your computers Device Manager.  
Window s 2000 Professional:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt Systemt Hardware, and  
click the Device Managerbutton.  
Other OS:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt System, and click Device  
Manager.  
6 Select Other devices.  
Select the device prefixed with the ?mark and delete.  
Ex: (?)Sony Handycam  
7 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then  
disconnect the USB cable.  
8 Restart your computer.  
Step2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM  
Perform the entire procedure described in Installing the USB driveron page 159.  
164  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e w it h  
yo u r co m p u t e r Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s w it h PIXELA Im a g e Mixe r Ve r.1.0 fo r So n y”  
You need to install the USB driver and PIXELA ImageMixerto view images recorded  
on a tape with your computer (p. 159).  
To install and use this software in Windows 2000 Professional, you must be authorized  
as Power Users or Administrators. For Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional, you  
must be authorized as Administrators.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Connect the AC power adaptor, and insert a tape into your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
Select USB STREAM in  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 183).  
(4) Select Startt Programt PIXELAt ImageMixert PIXELA  
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.  
(5) Click  
on the screen.  
The PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sonystartup screen appears on your  
computer. The title screen is displayed.  
(6) Select  
.
Preview window  
165  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e w it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
(7) Connect the USB jack on your computer to the (USB) jack on your camcorder  
using the supplied USB cable.  
(USB) jack  
USB jack  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
(8) Press N to start playback.  
The picture from the tape appears on preview window on your computer.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r  
(1) Follow the steps 1, 2 on page 165.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
Select USB STREAM in  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 183).  
(3) Follow the steps 4 to 7 on pages 165 and 166.  
The picture from your camcorder appears on preview window on your  
computer.  
Ca p t u rin g st ill im a g e s  
Preview window  
Thumbnail list widow  
(1) Select  
.
(2) Looking at the preview window, move the cursor to  
point you want to capture.  
and press it at the  
The still image on the screen is captured.  
Captured images are displayed in the thumbnail list window.  
166  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e w it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Ca p t u rin g m o vin g p ict u re s  
Preview window  
Thumbnail list widow  
(1) Select  
(2) Look at the preview window and click on  
you want to capture. changes to  
(3) Look at the preview window and click on  
.
at the first scene of the movie  
at the last scene you want to  
.
capture. The captured images appear in the thumbnail list window.  
Notes  
The following may occur while using your camcorder, and are not due to any  
malfunction.  
The image shakes up and down.  
Some images are not displayed correctly due to noise, etc.  
Images of different color systems to that of the camcorder are not displayed  
correctly.  
When your camcorder is in the standby mode with a cassette inserted, it turns off  
automatically after five minutes.  
We recommend setting DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings when your  
camcorder is in the standby mode, and no cassette is inserted.  
Indicators in the camcorder LCD screen do not appear on images that are captured  
into your computer.  
If image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection  
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your  
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Reinstall the USB driver  
following the procedure on page 162.  
If any trouble occurs  
Close all running applications, then restart your computer.  
Carry out the follow ing operations after quitting the application:  
Disconnect the USB cable.  
Set the POWER switch to the other position or OFF (CHG) on your camcorder.  
167  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e w it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Se e in g t h e o n -lin e h e lp (o p e ra t in g in st ru ct io n s) o f PIXELA  
Im a g e Mixe r Ve r.1.0 fo r So n y”  
A PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sonyon-line help site is available where you can  
find the detailed operating method of PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.  
(1) Click  
button located in the upper-right corner of the screen.  
The ImageMixers Manual screen appears.  
(2) You can find the information you need from the list of contents.  
To close on-line help  
Click the  
button at the top right of the screen.  
If you have any questions about PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”  
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sonyis a trademark of PIXELA corporation. For more  
information, refer to the instruction manual of the CD-ROM supplied with your  
camcorder.  
No t e o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r  
Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after  
recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.  
168  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry  
St ickw it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Vie w in g im a g e s  
Before operation  
You need to install the USB driver to view Memory Stickimages with your  
computer. (p. 159)  
An application such as Windows Media Player must be installed to play back moving  
pictures in Windows environment.  
Set USBCONNECT in  
to NORMAL in the menu settings.  
(The default setting is NORMAL.)  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder, and connect the AC power  
adaptor to your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the USB jack on your computer to the (USB) jack on your camcorder  
using the supplied USB cable.  
USB MODEappears on the screen of your camcorder.  
(USB) jack  
USB jack  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
(5) Open My Computeron Windows and double-click the newly recognized  
drive (Example: Removable Disk (E:)).  
The folders inside the Memory Stickare displayed.  
(6) Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder.  
For the detailed folder and file name, see Image file storage destinations and  
image files(p. 170).  
Desired file type  
Still image  
Double-click in this order  
Dcimfolder t 100msdcffolder  
Mssonyfolder t Moml0001folder t Image file*  
t
Image file  
Moving picture*  
* Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If  
you play back the file directly from the Memory Stick,the image and sound may  
break off.  
169  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ickw it h yo u r  
co m p u t e r Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Im a g e file st o ra g e d e st in a t io n s a n d im a g e file s  
Image files recorded with your camcorder are grouped in folders by recording mode.  
The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number within  
the range from 0001 to 9999.  
Fo r Win d o w s Me u se rs  
(Th e d rive re co g n isin g yo u r ca m co rd e r is [E:].)  
Folder containing still image data  
Folder containing moving picture data  
Folder  
File  
Meaning  
100MSDCF  
MOML0001  
DSC0ssss.JPG  
MOV0ssss.MPG  
Still image file  
Moving picture file  
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d re m o ve t h e Me m o ry St icko r se t  
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF(CHG)  
For Window s 2000 Professional/Me, Window s XP Home Edition/Professional users  
To unplug the USB cable, eject the Memory Stickor set the POWER switch to OFF  
(CHG) follow the procedure below.  
(1) Move the cursor to the Unplug or Eject Hardwareicon on the Task Tray and  
click to cancel the applicable drive.  
(2) After the Safe to removemessage appears, disconnect the USB cable and  
eject the Memory Stickor set the POWER switch to OFF(CHG).  
170  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r  
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to  
the computers USB jack. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied, along  
with the application software required for viewing images.  
Re co m m e n d e d Ma cin t o sh e n viro n m e n t  
OS:  
Mac OS 8.5.1/ 8.6/ 9.0/ 9.1/ 9.2 or Mac OS X (v10.0/ v10.1)  
Standard installation is required.  
However, note that the upgrade to Mac OS 9.0/ 9.1 should be used for the following  
models.  
iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive  
iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation  
The USB jack must be provided as standard.  
QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed to play back moving pictures.  
Notes  
Operations are not guaranteed for the Macintosh environment if you connect two or  
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.  
Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is  
used simultaneously.  
Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments  
mentioned above.  
Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.  
All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, TMand “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r  
Do not connect the USB cable to your computer before installation of the USB  
driver is completed.  
For Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1)  
The USB driver does not have to be installed. Your camcorder is automatically  
recognized as a drive just by connecting it to your Mac using the USB cable.  
For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
The application software screen appears.  
171  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs  
(3) Click the USB Driverto open the folder containing the six files related to  
Driver.”  
(4) Select the following two files, and drag and drop them into the System Folder.  
Sony Camcorder USB Driver  
Sony Camcorder USB Shim  
(5) When the message appears, click OK.”  
The USB driver is installed on your computer.  
(6) Remove the CD-ROM from the computer.  
(7) Restart your computer.  
172  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry  
St ickw it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Vie w in g im a g e s  
Before operation  
You need to install the USB driver to view a Memory Stickimages on your computer.  
(p. 171)  
QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed to play back moving pictures.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Mac OS to load.  
(2) Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder, and connect the AC power  
adaptor to your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB jack on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
USB MODEappears on the screen of your camcorder.  
(5) Double-click the Memory Stickicon on the desktop.  
The folders inside the Memory Stickare displayed.  
(6) Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder.  
Desired file type  
Still image  
Double-click in this order  
Dcimfolder t 100msdcffolder  
Mssonyfolder t Moml0001folder t Image file*  
t
Image file  
Moving picture*  
* Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If  
you play back the file directly from the Memory Stick,the image and sound may  
break off.  
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d re m o ve t h e Me m o ry St icko r se t  
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF(CHG)  
Follow the procedure below.  
(1) Close all running applications.  
Make sure that the access lamp of your camcorder is not lit.  
(2) Drag the Memory Stickicon into the Trash. Alternatively, select the  
Memory Stickicon by clicking on it, and then select Eject diskfrom the  
Specialmenu at the top left of the screen.  
(3) Unplug the USB cable or eject the Memory Stick.Set the POWER switch of  
your camcorder to OFF (CHG).  
For Mac OS X (v10.0) users  
Shut down your computer, then unplug the USB cable, eject the Memory Stickor set  
the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
173  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o  
u n it o n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n  
You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit connected to your  
computer which has the i.LINK (DV) jack connected to your camcorder.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Set A/ V t DV OUT in  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 178).  
(3) Start playback on the analog video unit.  
(4) Start procedures for capturing images and sound on your computer. The  
operation procedures depend on your computer and the software you are  
using.  
For details on how to capture images, refer to the instruction manuals of your  
computer and software you are using.  
DV IN/OUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUT  
Yellow  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
i.LINK  
AUDIO  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
Red  
VCR  
White  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)  
: Signal flow  
Aft e r ca p t u rin g im a g e s a n d so u n d  
Stop capturing procedures on your computer, and stop the playback on the analog  
video unit.  
Notes  
You need to install software that supports the exchange video signals.  
Depending on the state of the analog video signals, the computer may not be able to  
output the images correctly when you convert analog video signals into digital video  
signals via your camcorder. Depending on the analog video unit, the image may  
contain noise or incorrect colors.  
You cannot record or capture the video output via your camcorder when the video  
tapes include copyright protection signals such as the ID-2 system.  
You can capture images and sound with an S video cable (optional) instead of the  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied).  
If your computer has a USB jack  
You can connect using a USB cable, but images may not be transferred smoothly.  
174  
Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r —  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can partially be changed. First, select the icon,  
then the menu item and then the mode.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR or MEMORY (except DCR-TRV16),  
press MENU.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to  
set.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to  
set.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial  
to set.  
(5) If you want to change other items, select  
RETURN and press the dial, then  
repeat steps 2 to 4.  
For details, see Selecting the mode setting of each item(p. 176).  
CAMERA  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
1
MENU  
P
D
FLASH MODE  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
N. S. LIGHT  
AUTO SHTR  
[
] :  
MENU END  
VCR  
MANUAL SET  
P
D
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
OTHERS  
WORLD TIME  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
OTHERS  
WORLD TIME  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
RETURN  
0
HR  
2
3
4
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEMORY  
(Except DCR-TRV16)  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
FLASH MODE  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
OTHERS  
OTHERS  
WORLD TIME  
BEEP  
COMMANDER ON  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
RETURN  
N. S. LIGHT  
WORLD TIME  
BEEP  
COMMANDER ON  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
RETURN  
OFF  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[MENU] : END  
OTHERS  
WORLD TIME  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
RETURN  
OTHERS  
WORLD TIME  
BEEP  
COMMANDER OFF  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
RETURN  
ON  
OFF  
175  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
To m a ke t h e m e n u d isp la y d isa p p e a r  
Press MENU.  
Menu items are displayed as the follow ing icons:  
MANUAL SET  
CAMERA SET  
VCR SET  
LCD/ VF SET  
MEMORY SET (except DCR-TRV16)  
PRINT SET (except DCR-TRV16)  
CM SET  
TAPE SET  
SETUP MENU  
OTHERS  
Se le ct in g t h e m o d e se t t in g o f e a ch it e m z is the default setting.  
Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch. The screen shows  
only the items you can operate at the moment.  
POWER  
Icon/item  
MANUAL SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
sw itch  
PROGRAM AE  
To suit your specific shooting requirement  
(p. 58)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
P EFFECT  
To add special effects like those in films or on  
the TV to images (p. 54, 65)  
VCR  
CAMERA  
D EFFECT  
To add special effects using the various digital  
functions (p. 55, 66)  
VCR  
CAMERA  
FLASH MODE z ON  
To fire the flash (optional) regardless of the  
brightness of the surrondings  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
AUTO  
To fire the flash automatically  
AUTO  
To fire the flash before recording to reduce the  
red-eye phenomenon  
FLASH LVL  
HIGH  
z NORMAL  
LOW  
To make the flash level higher than normal  
Normal setting  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
To make the flash level lower than normal  
To adjust the white balance (p. 48)  
WHT BAL  
N.S.LIGHT  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
z ON  
To use the NightShot Light function (p. 34)  
To cancel the NightShot Light function  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
OFF  
AUTO SHTR z ON  
To automatically activate the electronic shutter  
when shooting in bright conditions  
CAMERA  
OFF  
To not automatically activate the electronic  
shutter even when shooting in bright conditions  
Note on FLASH MODE and FLASH LVL  
You cannot adjust FLASH MODE and FLASH LVL if the external flash (optional) is not  
connected.  
Note on FLASH LVL  
You cannot adjust FLASH LVL if the external flash (optional) is not compatible with the  
flash level.  
176  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
CAMERA SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
SELFTIMER* z OFF  
To not use the self-timer function  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
ON  
To use the self-timer function (p. 36, 45, 116, 127)  
D ZOOM  
z OFF  
To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 10× zoom  
is performed.  
CAMERA  
20×  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to  
20× zoom is performed digitally (p. 30)  
120×  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to  
120× zoom is performed digitally  
PHOTO REC* z MEMORY  
To record still images on a Memory Stick”  
when you press PHOTO during recording of  
moving pictures on a tape or the standby mode  
(p. 43)  
CAMERA  
TAPE  
To record still images on a tape when you press  
PHOTO during recording of moving pictures on  
a tape or the standby mode (p. 46)  
16:9WIDE  
z OFF  
CAMERA  
CAMERA  
ON  
To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 49)  
To compensate for camera-shake  
STEADYSHOT z ON  
OFF  
To cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural  
pictures are produced when shooting a  
stationary object with a tripod  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
z OFF  
ON  
To deactivate frame recording  
CAMERA  
CAMERA  
To activate frame recording (p. 64)  
To activate interval recording (p. 62)  
To deactivate interval recording  
ON  
z OFF  
SET  
To set the waiting time and recording time for  
interval recording  
* Except DCR-TRV16  
Notes on the SteadyShot function  
The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake.  
Attachment of a conversion lens (optional) may influence the SteadyShot function.  
If you cancel the SteadyShot function  
The SteadyShot off indicator “ ” appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive  
compensation for camera-shake.  
(continued on the following page)  
177  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
VCR SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
HiFi SOUND z STEREO  
To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track  
tape with main and sub sound (p. 195)  
VCR  
1
2
To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or  
a dual sound tape with main sound  
To play back a stereo tape with the right sound  
or a dual sound track tape with sub sound  
AUDIO MIX  
To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and  
stereo 2 (p. 96)  
VCR  
VCR  
ST 1  
ST 2  
A/V t DV OUT z OFF  
To output digital images and sound in analog  
format using your camcorder  
ON  
To output analog images and sound in digital  
format using your camcorder (p. 174)  
LCD/VF SET  
LCD BRIGHT  
To adjust the brightness on the LCD screen with VCR  
the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
To darken  
To lighten  
LCD B.L.  
z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the LCD screen to  
VCR  
normal  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
BRIGHT  
To brighten the LCD screen  
LCD COLOR  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
To adjust the color on the LCD screen, turn and  
press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
To get low-  
intensity  
To get high-  
intensity  
VF B.L.  
z BRT NORMAL  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to  
normal  
BRIGHT  
To brighten the viewfinder screen  
Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L.  
When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during  
recording.  
When you use power supplies other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically  
selected.  
Even if you adjust LCD BRIGHT, LCD B.L., LCD COLOR, and/or VF B.L.  
The recorded picture will not be affected.  
178  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
Mode  
Meaning  
MEMORY SET (except DCR-TRV16)  
STILL SET  
BURST  
z OFF  
NORMAL*  
To not record continuously  
MEMORY  
1)  
To record up to four (in 1152 × 864 size) or 13 (in  
640 × 480 size) still images continuously (p. 114)  
1)  
EXP BRKTG*  
To record three images consecutively with  
different exposures  
MULTI SCRN To record nine images continuously, display the  
images on a single page divided into nine boxes  
1)  
QUALITY  
z SUPER FINE* To record still images in the finest image quality VCR  
mode (p. 107)  
MEMORY  
2)  
FINE*  
STANDARD  
To record still images in the fine image quality  
mode  
To record still images in the standard image  
quality mode  
IMAGESIZE*1) z 1152 × 864  
640 × 480  
To record still images in 1152 × 864 size (p. 109)  
MEMORY  
To record still images in 640 × 480 size  
MOVIE SET  
IMAGESIZE z 320 × 240  
To record moving pictures in 320 × 240 size  
(p. 109)  
VCR  
MEMORY  
160 × 112  
To record moving pictures in 160 × 112 size  
REMAIN z AUTO  
To display the remaining capacity of the  
Memory Stickin the following cases:  
For five seconds after setting the POWER  
switch to VCR or MEMORY  
VCR  
MEMORY  
For five seconds after inserting a Memory  
Stickinto your camcorder in MEMORY or  
VCR  
When the capacity of the Memory Stickis  
less than two minutes in MEMORY  
For five seconds after starting a moving  
picture recording  
For five seconds after completing a moving  
picture recording  
ON  
To always display the remaining capacity of the  
Memory Stick”  
1)  
*
DCR-TRV25/ TRV27 only  
For DCR-TRV18, the default setting is FINE.  
2)  
*
(continued on the following page)  
179  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
Mode  
Meaning  
MEMORY SET (except DCR-TRV16)  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
ON  
To write a print mark on recorded still images  
you want to print out later (p. 151)  
VCR  
MEMORY  
z OFF  
To cancel print marks on still images  
ON  
To protect selected still images against  
accidental erasure (p. 148)  
VCR  
MEMORY  
z OFF  
To not protect still images  
SLIDE SHOW  
PHOTO SAVE  
FILE NO.  
To play back images in a continuous loop  
(p. 147)  
MEMORY  
VCR  
To copy mini DV still pictures on Memory  
Stick(p. 135)  
z SERIES  
RESET  
To assign numbers to file in sequence even if the VCR  
Memory Stickis changed  
MEMORY  
To reset the file numbering each time the  
Memory Stickis changed  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
To delete all unprotected images (p. 150)  
To cancel formatting  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
z RETURN  
OK  
To format an inserted Memory Stick”  
Formatting erases all information on the  
Memory Stick.  
Check the contents of the Memory Stick”  
before formatting.  
1. Select FORMAT with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC  
dial, then press the dial.  
2. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select OK,  
then press the dial.  
3. After EXECUTEappears, press the SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial. FORMATTINGflashes  
during formatting. COMPLETEappears  
when formatting is finished.  
Notes on formatting (except DCR-TRV16)  
Supplied or optional Memory Sticks have been formatted at factory. Formatting  
Memory Sticks on your camcorder is not required.  
Do not do any of the following while FORMATTING is displayed:  
Switch the POWER switch  
Operate buttons  
Eject the Memory Stick”  
You cannot format the Memory Stickif the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick”  
is set to LOCK.  
Format again if the message “  
FORMAT ERRORappears.  
Formatting erases protected image data on the Memory Stick.”  
180  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
Mode  
Meaning  
PRINT SET (except DCR-TRV16)  
9PIC PRINT  
DATE/TIME  
z RETURN  
SAME  
To cancel prints of split screens  
MEMORY  
To make prints of the same split screen (p. 152)  
To make prints of different split screens  
MULTI  
MARKED  
To make prints of images with print marks in  
recording order  
z OFF  
To make prints without the recording date and  
time  
MEMORY  
DATE  
To make prints with the recording date (p. 152)  
To make prints with the recording date and time  
DAY&TIME  
CM SET  
TITLE  
To superimpose a title or make your own title  
(p. 98, 101)  
VCR  
CAMERA  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
To erase the title you have superimposed  
(p. 100)  
VCR  
CAMERA  
z ON  
OFF  
z ON  
OFF  
To display the title you have superimposed  
To not display the title  
VCR  
VCR  
CM SEARCH  
To search using cassette memory (p. 70)  
To search without using cassette memory  
To label a cassette (p. 103)  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
VCR  
CAMERA  
To erase all the data in cassette memory (p. 104)  
VCR  
CAMERA  
Note on PRINT SET (except DCR-TRV16)  
9PIC PRINT and DATE/ TIME are displayed only when an external printer (optional) is  
connected to the intelligent accessory shoe.  
(continued on the following page)  
181  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
Mode  
Meaning  
z SP  
To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode  
VCR  
CAMERA  
LP  
To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the  
SP mode  
AUDIO MODE z 12BIT  
To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds) VCR  
CAMERA  
16BIT  
To record in the 16-bit mode (the one stereo  
sound with high quality)  
qREMAIN  
z AUTO  
To display the remaining tape bar:  
For about eight seconds after your camcorder  
is turned on and calculates the remaining  
amount of tape  
VCR  
CAMERA  
For about eight seconds after a cassette is  
inserted and your camcorder calculates the  
remaining amount of tape.  
For about eight seconds after N is pressed in  
VCR  
For about eight seconds after DISPLAY is  
pressed to display the screen indicators  
For the period of tape rewinding, forwarding  
or picture search in the VCR  
ON  
To always display the remaining tape indicator  
Notes on the LP mode  
When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing  
the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or  
VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound.  
When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/ Master  
cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.  
You cannot dub audio on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the  
tape to be audio dubbed.  
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in  
the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be  
written properly between scenes.  
Notes on AUDIO MODE  
You cannot dub audio on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode.  
When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance  
in AUDIO MIX.  
182  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
To set the date or time (p. 23)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
USB STREAM z OFF  
ON  
To deactivate the USB streaming function  
To activate the USB streaming function  
VCR  
CAMERA  
USBCONNECT* z NORMAL  
To connect and recognize the Memory Stick”  
MEMORY  
drive.  
PTP  
To connect and only copy a Memory Stick”  
image from your camcorder to a computer (only  
with Windows XP or Mac OS X)  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
USBCONNECT followed by PTP, and press to  
set.  
2 Insert the Memory Stickin the camcorder,  
and connect the camcorder to the computer  
using the USB cable. Copy Wizard will  
automatically start up.  
LTR SIZE  
z NORMAL  
To display selected menu items in normal size  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
2×  
To display selected menu items at twice the  
normal size  
LANGUAGE  
z ENGLISH  
To display the following information indicators  
in English: REC, STBY, min, sec, CAPTURE,  
END SEARCH and VOL, etc.  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
FRANÇAIS  
To display the information indicators in French  
To display the information indicators in Spanish  
ESPAÑOL  
PORTUGUÊS To display the information indicators in  
Portuguese  
To display the information indicators in Chinese  
To display the information indicators in Korean  
z ON  
DEMO MODE  
To make the demonstration appear  
To cancel the demonstration mode  
CAMERA  
OFF  
*Except DCR-TRV16  
Notes on DEMO MODE  
You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette or a Memory Stickis inserted in  
your camcorder.  
The DEMO MODE default setting is STBY (Standby) and the demonstration starts  
about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a  
cassette and a Memory Stickinserted.  
To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette or a Memory Stick, set the POWER  
switch to other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF. To set to STBY (Standby)  
again, leave the DEMO MODE at ON in the menu settings, turn the POWER switch to  
OFF (CHG), and return the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
When NIGHTSHOT is set to ON, the NIGHTSHOTindicator appears on the screen  
and you cannot select DEMO MODE in the menu settings.  
(continued on the following page)  
183  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
OTHERS  
Mode  
Meaning  
DATA CODE z DATE/ CAM  
To press DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander to display date, time and various  
settings during playback (p. 39)  
VCR  
MEMORY  
DATE  
To press DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander to display date and time during  
playback  
WORLD TIME  
BEEP  
To set the clock to the local time. Turn the SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial to set a time difference. The  
clock changes by the time difference you set  
here. If you set the time difference to 0, the clock  
returns to the originally set time.  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
z MELODY  
To output the melody when you start/ stop  
recording or when an unusual condition occurs  
on your camcorder  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
NORMAL  
OFF  
To output the beep instead of the melody  
To cancel the melody and beep sound  
COMMANDER z ON  
To activate the Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
OFF  
To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid  
erroneous remote control operation caused by  
other VCRs remote control.  
DISPLAY  
z LCD  
V-OUT/ LCD  
To show the display on the LCD screen and in  
the viewfinder  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
To show the display on the TV screen, LCD  
screen and in the viewfinder  
REC LAMP  
VIDEO EDIT  
z ON  
To light up the camera recording lamp at the  
front of your camcorder  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
OFF  
To turn the camera recording lamp off so that  
the person is not aware of the recording  
z RETURN*  
To cancel video editing  
VCR  
TAPE*  
To make program and perform video editing  
(p. 78)  
MEMORY*  
To make program and perform MPEG editing  
(p. 132)  
* Except DCR-TRV16  
Note  
If you press DISPLAY with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings, the  
picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when your  
camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR.  
In more than five minutes after removing the pow er source  
The PROGRAM AE, AUDIO MIX, COMMANDER, HiFi SOUND, and WHT  
BALsettings are returned to their factory settings.  
Other menu settings are held in memory even when the battery is removed.  
When recording a close subject  
When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of the  
camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend that you  
set REC LAMP to OFF.  
184  
Tro u b le sh o o t in g —  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct  
t ro u b le  
If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to  
troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and  
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If C:ss:ss”  
appears on the screen, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 191.  
In t h e re co rd in g m o d e  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
START/ STOP does not operate.  
The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.  
c Set it to CAMERA. (p. 26)  
The cassette has run out.  
c Rewind the tape or insert a new one. (p. 25, 40)  
The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark.  
c Use a new tape or slide the tab. (p. 25)  
The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 202)  
The power goes off.  
While being operated in CAMERA, your camcorder has  
been in the standby mode for more than five minutes.  
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to  
CAMERA.  
The battery pack is dead or nearly dead.  
c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 16)  
The image on the viewfinder screen  
is not clear.  
The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.  
c Adjust the viewfinder lens. (p. 29)  
The SteadyShot function does not  
work.  
STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON. (p. 177)  
The autofocusing function does not  
work.  
The setting is the manual focus.  
c Press FOCUS/ INFINITY to set to the autofocus mode.  
(p. 61)  
Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.  
c Adjust for manual focusing. (p. 61)  
The picture does not appear in the  
viewfinder.  
The LCD panel is open.  
c Close the LCD panel. (p. 28)  
A vertical band appears when you  
shoot a subject such as lights or a  
candle flame against a dark  
background.  
The contrast between the subject and background is too  
high. This is not a malfunction.  
A vertical band appears when you  
shoot a very bright subject.  
This is not a malfunction.  
Some tiny white, red, blue or green  
spots appear on the screen.  
Slow shutter, Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter is  
activated. This is not a malfunction.  
An unknown picture is displayed on  
the screen.  
If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to  
CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu  
settings without a cassette and a Memory Stickinserted,  
your camcorder automatically starts the demonstration.  
c Insert a cassette or a Memory Stickand the  
demonstration stops.  
You can also cancel DEMO MODE. (p. 183)  
(continued on the following page)  
185  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The picture is recorded in incorrect or  
unnatural colors.  
NIGHTSHOT is set to ON.  
c Set it to OFF. (p. 34)  
The picture appears too bright, and  
the subject does not appear on the  
screen.  
NIGHTSHOT is set to ON in a bright place.  
c Set it to OFF . (p. 34)  
BACK LIGHT is activated.  
c Deactivate it. (p. 33)  
You cannot record still images on a  
Memory Stickin standby mode or  
while recording on tape.*  
PHOTO REC is set to TAPE in the menu settings.  
c Set it to MEMORY (p. 177).  
You cannot record still images on a  
tape.*  
PHOTO REC is set to MEMORY in the menu settings.  
c Set it to TAPE (p. 177).  
The click of the shutter does not  
sound.  
BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL. (p. 184)  
Black bands appear when you  
record TV or computer screen.  
c Set the STEADYSHOT to OFF in the menu settings.  
(p. 177)  
* Except DCR-TRV16  
In t h e p la yb a ck m o d e  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The POWER switch is not set to VCR.  
c Set it to VCR. (p. 38)  
The tape does not move when a  
video control button is pressed.  
The cassette has run out of tape.  
The playback button does not work.  
c Rewind the tape. (p. 40)  
The video heads may be dirty.  
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional).  
(p. 203)  
There are horizontal lines on the  
picture or the playback picture is not  
clear or does not appear.  
The stereo tape is played back with HiFi SOUND set to 2  
in the menu settings.  
No sound or only a low sound is  
heard when playing back a tape.  
c Set it to STEREO (p. 178).  
The volume is turned to minimum.  
c Turn up the volume. (p. 38)  
AUDIO MIX is set to ST2 in the menu settings.  
c Adjust AUDIO MIX. (p. 178)  
The cassette has no cassette memory.  
c Use a cassette with cassette memory. (p. 71)  
CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON. (p. 181)  
During displaying the recorded date,  
date search function does not work.  
The tape has a blank portion during recorded portions.  
(p. 72)  
186  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The cassette has no cassette memory.  
c Use a cassette with cassette memory. (p. 70)  
CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON. (p. 181)  
The title search function does not  
work.  
There is no title in the tape.  
c Superimpose the titles. (p. 98)  
The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions.  
(p. 70)  
AUDIO MIX is set to the ST1 side in the menu settings.  
c Adjust AUDIO MIX. (p. 178)  
The new sound added to the  
recorded tape is not heard.  
TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
The title is not displayed.  
c Set it to ON. (p. 181)  
In t h e re co rd in g a n d p la yb a ck m o d e s  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.  
c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 16, 17)  
The power does not turn on.  
The AC power adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet.  
c Connect the AC power adaptor to a wall outlet. (p. 22)  
The tape was ejected after recording when using a cassette  
without cassette memory. (p. 37)  
The end search function does not  
work.  
You have not recorded on the new cassette yet. (p. 37)  
The tape has a blank portion at the beginning or midway.  
(p. 37)  
The end search function does not  
work correctly.  
The operating temperature is too low.  
The battery pack is not fully charged.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again. (p. 17)  
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be  
recharged.  
The battery pack is quickly  
discharged.  
c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 16)  
You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or  
cold environment for a long time.  
The battery remaining time indicator  
does not indicate the correct time.  
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be  
recharged.  
c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 16)  
The battery is not fully charged.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again. (p. 17)  
A deviation has occured in the remaining battery time.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication  
on the battery remaining battery time indicator is  
correct. (p. 17)  
A deviation has occured in the remaining battery time.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication  
on the battery remaining battery time indicator is  
correct. (p. 17)  
The power goes off although the  
battery remaining time indicator  
indicates that the battery pack has  
enough power to operate.  
(continued on the following page)  
187  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The power supply is disconnected.  
c Connect it firmly. (p. 16, 22)  
The battery is dead.  
The cassette cannot be removed from  
the holder.  
c Use a charged battery pack. (p. 16, 17)  
Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 202)  
The % and Z indicators flash and no  
functions except for cassette ejection  
work.  
The gold-plated connector of the cassette is dirty or dusty.  
c Clean the gold-plated connector. (p. 196)  
indicator does not appear when  
using a cassette with cassette  
memory.  
The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape  
indicator. (p. 182)  
Remaining tape indicator is not  
displayed.  
Wh e n o p e ra t in g u sin g t h e Me m o ry St ick”  
Exce p t DCR-TRV16  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The Memory Stickdoes not  
function.  
The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY.  
c Set it to MEMORY. (p. 107)  
The Memory Stickis not inserted.  
c Insert a Memory Stick. (p. 106)  
Recording does not function.  
The Memory Stickhas already been recorded to its full  
capacity.  
c Delete unnecessary images and record again. (p. 149)  
The Memory Stickformatted incorrectly is inserted.  
c Format the Memory Stickor use another Memory  
Stick.(p. 180)  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock. (p. 105)  
The image cannot be deleted.  
The image is protected.  
c Cancel the image protection. (p. 148)  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock. (p. 105)  
You cannot format the Memory  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
Stick.  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock. (p. 105)  
Deleting all the images cannot be  
carried out.  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock. (p. 105)  
You cannot protect the image.  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock. (p. 105)  
The image to protect is not played back.  
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 137)  
188  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
You cannot write a print mark on  
the still image.  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock. (p. 105)  
The image to write a print mark is not played back.  
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 137)  
You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture.  
c Print marks cannot be written on a moving picture.  
The photo save function does not  
work.  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock. (p. 105)  
You cannot play back images in  
actual size.  
You may not be able to play back images in actual size  
when you try to play back images recorded by other  
equipment. This is not a malfunction.  
You cannot play back image data.  
Your camcorder cannot play back some images processed  
with a computer (The file name will blink).  
If you record images with any other equipment, the  
images may not play back normally on your camcorder.  
Ot h e rs  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The title is not recorded.  
The cassette has no cassette memory.  
c Use a cassette with cassette memory. (p. 98)  
The cassette memory is full.  
c Erase unwanted title. (p. 100)  
The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure.  
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not  
visible. (p. 25)  
The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions.  
c Superimpose the title to a recorded portion. (p. 98)  
The cassette label is not recorded.  
The cassette has no cassette memory.  
c Use a cassette with cassette memory. (p. 103)  
The cassette memory is full.  
c Erase unwanted titles. (p. 100)  
The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure.  
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red mark is not visible.  
(p. 25)  
Digital program editing to a tape  
does not function.  
The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.  
c Check the connection and set the input selector on the  
VCR again (p. 78)  
The camcorder is connected to DV equipment of other  
than Sony using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).  
c Set it to IR (p. 83).  
Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is  
attempted.  
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 86).  
The camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized.  
c Adjust the synchronization (p. 84).  
The IR SETUP code is incorrect.  
c Set the correct code (p. 79).  
(continued on the following page)  
189  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
Digital program editing to a  
Memory Stickdoes not function.*  
Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is  
attempted.  
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 132).  
The Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder does not work.  
COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON. (p. 184)  
Something is blocking the infrared rays.  
c Remove the obstacle.  
The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the + –  
polarities incorrectly matching the + marks.  
c Insert the batteries correctly. (p. 216)  
The batteries are dead.  
c Insert new ones. (p. 216)  
The picture from a TV or VCR does  
not appear even when your  
camcorder is connected to output on  
the TV or VCR.  
DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings.  
c Set it to LCD. (p. 184)  
The melody or beep sounds for five  
seconds.  
Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 202)  
Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder.  
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate  
your camcorder.  
No function works though the power Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or  
is on.  
remove the battery, then reconnect it in about one minute.  
Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work, open  
the LCD panel and press the RESET button using a sharp-  
pointed object. (If you press the RESET button, all the  
settings including the date and time return to their  
defaults) (p. 213)  
While charging the battery pack, no  
indicator appears or the indicator  
flashes in the display window.  
The battery pack is not properly installed.  
c Install it properly. (p. 16)  
Something is wrong with the battery pack.  
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony  
service facility.  
You cannot charge the battery pack.  
The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).  
c Set it to OFF (CHG). (p. 17)  
Image data cannot be transferred by  
the USB connection.  
The USB cable was connected before installation of the  
USB driver was completed.  
c Uninstall the incorrect USB driver and re-install the USB  
driver (p. 162).  
USBCONNECT is set to PTP when the POWER switch is  
set to MEMORY.*  
c Set it to NORMAL. (p. 183)  
When you set the POWER switch to  
VCR or OFF (CHG), if you move  
your camcorder, you may hear a  
clatter sound from inside your  
camcorder (DCR-TRV25/ TRV27  
only).  
This is because some functions use a linear mechanism.  
This is not a malfunction.  
The cassette cannot be removed even Moisture has started to condense in your camcorder  
if the cassette lid is open.  
(p. 202).  
* Except DCR-TRV16  
190  
Se lf-d ia g n o sis d isp la y  
Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display  
function.  
LCD scre e n , vie w fin d e r o r  
d isp la y w in d o w  
This function displays the current state of your  
camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a  
letter and figures) in the viewfinder, on the LCD  
screen or in the display window. If a 5-digit code is  
displayed, check the following list of codes. The  
last two digits (indicated by ss) differ depending  
on the state of your camcorder.  
:
:
C 21 00  
Self-diagnosis display  
C:ss:ss  
You can service your camcorder  
yourself.  
E:ss:ss  
Contact your Sony dealer or local  
authorized Sony service facility.  
Five-digit display  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
You are using a battery pack that is not an  
C:04:ss  
InfoLITHIUMbattery pack.  
c Use an InfoLITHIUMbattery pack. (p. 197)  
C:21:ss  
Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize. (p. 202)  
C:22:ss  
The video heads are dirty.  
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional).  
(p. 203)  
C:31:ss  
C:32:ss  
A malfunction other than the above that you can service  
has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate  
your camcorder.  
c Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or  
remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power  
supply, operate your camcorder.  
E:20:ss  
E:61:ss  
E:62:ss  
A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.  
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony  
service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code.  
(example: E:61:10)  
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times, contact your  
Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.  
191  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s  
If indicators and messages appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, check the  
following:  
See the page in parentheses ( )for more information.  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs  
:
:
100 0001  
C 21 00  
100-0001 Warning indicator as to file  
Slow flashing:  
Warning indicator as to Memory Stick”  
2)  
formatting*1)  
*
The file is corrupted.  
Fast flashing:  
The file is unreadable.  
You are trying to use the MEMORY MIX  
function on a moving picture.* (p. 124)  
• “Memory Stickis not formatted correctly  
(p. 180).  
The Memory Stickdata is corrupted.  
1)  
(p. 105)  
C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display (p. 191)  
Q Warning indicator as to tape  
Slow flashing:  
E The battery is dead or nearly dead  
Slow flashing:  
The battery is nearly dead.  
The tape is near the end.  
2)  
No tape is inserted.*  
Depending on the operating conditions,  
environment and battery condition, the E  
indicator may flash even if there are  
approximately five to 10 minutes remaining.  
The write-protect tab on the cassette is  
exposed (red)* (p. 25).  
2)  
Fast flashing:  
The cassette has run out of tape.*  
2)  
% Moisture condensation has occurred*2)  
Fast flashing:  
Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder,  
and leave it for about one hour with the  
cassette compartment open (p. 202).  
Z You need to eject the cassette*2)  
Slow flashing:  
The write-protect tab on the cassette is  
exposed (red) (p. 25).  
Fast flashing:  
Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 202).  
The cassette has run out of tape.  
The self-diagnosis display function is  
activated (p. 191).  
Warning indicator as to cassette  
memory*2)  
Slow flashing:  
No cassette with cassette memory is inserted  
(p. 194).  
2)  
- The still image is protected*1)  
*
Slow flashing:  
The still image is protected (p. 148).  
Warning indicator as to Memory  
Stick*1)  
Slow flashing:  
No Memory Stickis inserted.  
Warning indicator as to recording of  
still image  
Slow flashing:  
2)  
Fast flashing* :  
The Memory Stickis not readable on your  
camcorder (p. 105).  
The image cannot be recorded on a Memory  
Stick.  
The still image cannot be recorded on a tape  
1)  
or a Memory Stick* (p. 44, 46)  
1)  
*
Except DCR-TRV16  
You hear the melody or beep.  
2)  
*
192  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s  
Wa rn in g m e ssa g e s  
CLOCK SET  
Set the date and time (p. 23).  
FOR InfoLITHIUM”  
BATTERY ONLY  
Use an InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (p. 21).  
CLEANING CASSETTE  
The video heads are dirty. The x indicator and “  
CLEANING CASSETTEmessage appear one after  
another on the screen (p. 203).  
2)  
FULL  
16BIT  
The cassette memory is full.*  
2)  
AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT (p. 182).* You cannot  
dub new audio.  
2)  
REC MODE  
TAPE  
REC MODE is set to LP (p. 182).* You cannot dub  
new audio.  
2)  
There is no recorded portion on the tape.* You  
cannot dub new audio.  
2)  
i.LINKCABLE  
The i.LINK cable is connected (p. 91).* You cannot  
dub new audio.  
1)  
2)  
FULL*  
The Memory Stickis full (p. 135).*  
1)  
-*  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
2)  
LOCK (p. 105).*  
1)  
NO FILE*  
No still image is recorded on the Memory Stick”  
2)  
(p. 138).*  
1)  
2)  
NO MEMORY STICK*  
No Memory Stickis inserted.*  
1)  
AUDIO ERROR*  
You are trying to record an image with sound that  
cannot be recorded by your camcorder on the  
2)  
Memory Stick(p. 129).*  
1)  
NO STILL IMAGE FILE*  
No still image is recorded on the Memory  
Stickthough you are trying to print in the 9PIC  
PRINT mode (p. 153).  
1)  
2)  
MEMORY STICK ERROR* The Memory Stickdata is corrupted (p. 106).*  
1)  
FORMAT ERROR*  
The Memory Stickis not recognized. Check the  
2)  
format (p. 180).*  
1)  
- DIRECTORY ERROR* There are more than two of the same directories  
2)  
(p. 137).*  
1)  
PLAY ERROR*  
The image cannot be played back. Reinsert the  
Memory Stick, then play back the image again.  
1)  
REC ERROR*  
Check the input signals before retrying recording  
(p. 119, 131).  
COPY INHIBIT  
The tape contains copyright control signals for  
2)  
copyright protection of software (p. 195).*  
1)  
NO PRINT MARK*  
You selected MARKED in 9PIC PRINT in the menu  
settings using a Memory Stickcontaining no image  
2)  
with a print mark (p. 153).*  
2)  
Q Z TAPE END  
The tape has reached its end.*  
2)  
Q NO TAPE  
Insert a cassette tape.*  
1)  
DELETING*  
You have pressed PHOTO during deleting all images  
on Memory Stick.”  
1)  
FORMATTING*  
You have pressed PHOTO during formatting a  
Memory Stick.”  
NOW CHARGING  
Charging an external flash (optional) does not work  
correctly.*  
2)  
1)  
*
Except DCR-TRV16  
You hear the melody or beep.  
2)  
*
193  
Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n —  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
Se le ct in g ca sse t t e t yp e s  
You can use  
Hi8, Digital8,  
ED Betamax,  
mini DV cassettes only*. You cannot use any other 8 mm,  
VHS,  
VHSC,  
S-VHS,  
S-VHSC, Betamax,  
DV or  
MICRO MV cassette.  
* There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette  
memory. Cassettes with cassette memory have the (Cassette Memory) mark.  
We recommend you to use cassette with cassette memory.  
IC memory is mounted on this type of cassette. Your camcorder can read and write  
data such as dates of recording or titles, etc. to this memory.  
The functions using the cassette memory require successive signals recorded on the  
tape. If the tape has a blank portion at the beginning or between recorded portions,  
titles may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work properly.  
Perform the following to prevent a blank portion from being made on the tape.  
Press END SEARCH to go to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the  
next recording if you operate the following:  
You have changed the cassette while recording.  
You have played back the tape.  
You have used the edit search function.  
If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on your tape, re-record from the  
beginning to the end of the tape as described above.  
The same result may occur when you record using a digital video camera recorder  
without a cassette memory function on a tape recorded by one with the cassette  
memory function.  
mark on the cassette  
The memory capacity of cassettes marked with  
accommodate tapes having a memory capacity of up to 16Kbit. 16Kbit cassettes are  
marked with  
is 4Kbit. Your camcorder can  
.
This is the Mini DV mark.  
This is the Cassette Memory mark.  
These are trademarks.  
194  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
Co p yrig h t sig n a l  
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck  
Using any other video camera recorder, you cannot record on a tape that has recorded  
copyright control signals for copyright protection of software which is played back on  
your camcorder.  
Wh e n yo u re co rd  
You cannot record softw are on your camcorder that contains copyright control  
signals for copyright protection of softw are.  
COPY INHIBITappears on the screen or on the TV screen if you try to record such  
software.  
Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the tape when it records.  
Au d io m o d e  
12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in  
stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be  
adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback.  
Both sounds can be played back.  
16-bit mode: New audio cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in  
high quality. Moreover, your camcorders can also play back sound  
recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When playing back a tape  
recorded in the 16-bit mode, the 16BIT indicator appears on the screen.  
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck a d u a l so u n d t ra ck t a p e  
When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi  
SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 178).  
Sound from speaker  
HiFi SOUND  
mode  
Playing back  
a stereo tape  
Playing back a dual  
sound track tape  
Main sound and  
sub sound  
STEREO  
Stereo  
1
2
Left sound  
Main sound  
Sub sound  
Right sound  
You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.  
195  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
No t e s o n t h e ca sse t t e  
Wh e n a ffixin g a la b e l o n t h e ca sse t t e  
Be sure to affix a label only at the locations illustrated below [a ] to prevent a  
malfunction of your camcorder.  
Aft e r u sin g t h e ca sse t t e  
Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it upright.  
Wh e n t h e ca sse t t e m e m o ry fu n ct io n d o e s n o t w o rk  
Reinsert a cassette. The gold-plated connector of the cassette may be dirty or dusty.  
Cle a n in g t h e g o ld -p la t e d co n n e ct o r  
If the gold-plated connector on the cassette is dirty or dusty, the remaining tape  
indicator is sometimes not displayed correctly, and you may not be able to operate  
functions using cassette memory.  
Clean the gold-plated connector with a cotton-wool swab, about every 10 times that the  
cassette is ejected. [b ]  
Do not affix a label  
along this border.  
[b ]  
[a ]  
196  
Ab o u t t h e In fo LITHIUMb a t t e ry p a ck  
Wh a t is t h e In fo LITHIUMb a t t e ry p a ck?  
The InfoLITHIUMbattery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for  
communicating information related to operating conditions between the battery pack  
and an AC adaptor/ charger (optional).  
The InfoLITHIUMbattery pack calculates the power consumption according to the  
operating conditions of your camcorder, and displays the remaining battery time in  
minutes.  
With an AC adaptor/ charger (optional), the remaining battery time and charging time  
are displayed.  
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your camcorder.  
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between  
10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) until FULL appears in the display window, indicating that  
the battery pack is fully charged. If you charge the battery pack outside of this  
temperature range, you may not be able to efficiently charge the battery pack.  
After charging is completed, either disconnect the cable from the DC IN jack on your  
camcorder or remove the battery pack.  
Effe ct ive u se o f t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Battery pack performance decreases in low-temperature surroundings. So, the time  
that the battery pack can be used becomes shorter. We recommend the following to  
ensure longer battery pack use:  
Put the battery pack in a pocket close to your body to warm it up, and insert it in  
your camcorder immediately before you start taking shots.  
Use the large capacity battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91,  
optional).  
Frequently using the LCD panel or frequently operating playback, fast forward or  
rewind wears out the battery pack faster. We recommend using the large capacity  
battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91, optional).  
Be sure to turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) when not taking shots or playing  
back on your camcorder. The battery pack is also consumed when your camcorder is  
in the standby mode or playback is paused.  
Have spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected recording time,  
and make a trial recording before the actual recording.  
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.  
197  
Ab o u t t h e In fo LITHIUMb a t t e ry p a ck  
Re m a in in g b a t t e ry t im e in d ica t o r  
If the power goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that the  
battery pack has enough power to operate, charge the battery pack fully again so that  
the indication on the remaining battery time indicator is correct. Note, however, that  
the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high  
temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is  
frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate  
shooting time.  
The E mark indicating that there is little remaining battery time sometimes flashes  
depending on the operating conditions or ambient temperature and environment even  
if the remaining battery time is about five to ten minutes.  
Ho w t o st o re t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
If the battery pack is not used for a long time, do the following procedure once per  
year to maintain proper function.  
1. Fully charge the battery.  
2. Discharge on your electronic equipment.  
3. Remove the battery from the equipment and store it in a dry, cool place.  
To use the battery pack up on your camcorder, leave your camcorder in the recording  
standby mode until the power goes off without a cassette inserted.  
Ba t t e ry life  
The battery life is limited. Battery capacity drops little by little as you use it more and  
more, and as time passes. When the available battery time is shortened considerably, a  
probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Buy a new  
battery pack.  
The battery life varies according to how it is stored and operating conditions and  
environment for each battery pack.  
198  
Ab o u t i.LINK  
The DV jack on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant DV input/ output jack. This section  
describes the i.LINK standard and its features.  
Wh a t is i.LINK?  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other  
data in two directions between equipment having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling  
other equipment.  
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible  
applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment.  
When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this unit in a daisy  
chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that  
this unit is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected  
equipment.  
Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the  
characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that operations  
and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment.  
Note  
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this unit by the i.LINK  
cable (DV connecting cable). When connecting this unit to i.LINK-compatible  
equipment having two or more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the operating  
instructions of the equipment to be connected.  
Ab o u t t h e n a m e i.LINK”  
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY,  
and is a trademark approved by many corporations.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronic Engineers.  
199  
Ab o u t i.LINK  
i.LINK b a u d ra t e  
i.LINKs maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum baud  
rates are defined:  
S100 (approx. 100Mbps*)  
S200 (approx. 200Mbps)  
S400 (approx. 400Mbps)  
The baud rate is listed under Specificationsin the operating instructions of each  
equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some equipment.  
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is  
S100.  
When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the  
baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.  
*What is Mbps?  
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or received  
in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100Mbps means that 100 megabits of data  
can be sent in one second.  
i.LINK fu n ct io n s o n t h is u n it  
For details on how to dub when this unit is connected to other video equipment having  
DV jacks, see page 76 and 91.  
This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK (DV) compatible equipment made by  
SONY (e.g. VAIO series personal computer) other than video equipment.  
Before connecting this unit to a personal computer, make sure that application software  
supported by this unit is already installed on the personal computer.  
For details on precautions when connecting this unit, also refer to the operating  
instructions of the equipment to be connected.  
Re q u ire d i.LINK ca b le  
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during DV dubbing).  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
200  
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d  
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d  
You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC power adaptor  
supplied with your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz.  
Use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a ], if necessary, depending on the  
design of the wall outlet [b ].  
AC-L10A/L10B/L10C  
[a ]  
[b ]  
Your camcorder is an NTSC system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback  
picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system based TV with the AUDIO/ VIDEO input  
jack.  
The following shows TV color systems used overseas.  
NTSC system  
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana,  
Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A.,  
Venezuela, etc.  
PAL system  
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,  
Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway,  
Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand,  
United Kingdom, etc.  
PAL-M system  
Brazil  
PAL-N system  
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay  
SECAM system  
Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.  
Sim p le se t t in g o f clo ck b y t im e d iffe re n ce  
You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select WORLD  
TIME in the menu settings. See page 184 for more information.  
201  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d  
p re ca u t io n s  
Mo ist u re co n d e n sa t io n  
If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may  
condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this state,  
the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not  
operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and the %  
indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is inserted  
in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear.  
If m o ist u re co n d e n sa t io n h a s o ccu rre d  
None of the functions except  
OPEN/ EJECT switch (cassette ejection) work while  
the alarm indicator is on. Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for  
about one hour with the cassette compartment open. Your camcorder can be used again  
if the % indicator does not appear when the power is turned on again.  
If moisture starts to condense, your camcorder sometimes cannot detect condensation.  
If this happens, the cassette is sometimes not ejected for 10 seconds after the cassette lid  
is opened. This is not a malfunction. Do not close the cassette lid until the cassette is  
ejected.  
Note on moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm  
place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:  
You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by a heating  
device.  
You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place  
outside.  
You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower.  
You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humid place.  
How to prevent moisture condensation  
When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your  
camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature  
inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).  
202  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n  
Cle a n in g t h e vid e o h e a d s  
To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads. The video heads  
may be dirty when:  
Mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.  
Playback pictures do not move.  
Playback pictures do not appear.  
The x indicator and CLEANING CASSETTEmessage appear one after another  
or the x indicator flashes on the screen.  
If the above problem [a ], [b ] or [c] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the  
Sony DVM-12CLD cleaning cassette (optional). Check the picture and if the above  
problem persists, repeat cleaning.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen becomes blue [c].  
Note on the videohead  
The videohead suffers from wear after long use. If you cannot obtain a clear image even  
after using a cleaning cassette, it might be because the videohead is worn. Please contact  
your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility to have the videohead  
replaced.  
Cle a n in g t h e LCD scre e n  
If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using the LCD  
Cleaning Kit (optional) to clean the LCD screen.  
Ch a rg in g t h e b u ilt -in re ch a rg e a b le b a t t e ry in yo u r ca m co rd e r  
The built-in rechargeable battry is installed in your camcorder to retain the date and  
time, etc., regardless of the setting of the POWER switch. The built-in rechargeable  
battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The battery,  
however, will become discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder. It will be  
completely discharged in about four months if you do not use your camcorder at all.  
Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, it will not affect camcorder  
operation. To retain the date, time, and other information, charge the battery if the  
battery is discharged.  
Charging the built-in rechargeable battery:  
Connect your camcorder to wall outlet using the AC power adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for  
more than 24 hours.  
Or, install a fully charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder  
with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours.  
203  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Pre ca u t io n s  
Ca m co rd e r o p e ra t io n  
Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor).  
For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in these operating  
instructions.  
If any solid object or liquid gets inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it  
checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.  
Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.  
Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder.  
Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so  
might cause heat to build up inside.  
Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.  
Do not touch the LCD screen with your fingers or a sharp-pointed object.  
If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD  
screen. This is not a malfunction.  
While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a  
malfunction.  
On h a n d lin g t a p e s  
Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are  
used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.  
Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape.  
Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with  
a soft cloth.  
Ca m co rd e r ca re  
Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and VCR  
sections and play back a tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is not to  
be used for a long time.  
Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens,  
remove them with a soft cloth.  
Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with  
a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the  
finish.  
Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy  
beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause  
your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.  
204  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
AC p o w e r a d a p t o r  
Unplug the unit from the wall outlet when you are not using it for a long time. To  
disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself.  
Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or  
damaged.  
Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage  
the cord and may cause fire or electric shock.  
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the  
connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.  
Always keep metal contacts clean.  
Do not disassemble the unit.  
Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.  
While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers  
and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and  
video operation.  
The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.  
Do not place the unit in locations that are:  
Extremely hot or cold  
Dusty or dirty  
Very humid  
Vibrating  
Ab o u t ca re a n d st o ra g e o f t h e le n s  
Wipe the surface of the lens clean with a soft cloth in the following instancess:  
When there are fingerprints on the lens surface  
In hot or humid locations  
When the lens is used in environments susceptible to salt such as the seaside  
Store the lens in a well-ventilated location subject to little dirt or dust.  
To prevent mold from occurring, periodically perform the above.  
We recommend turning on and operating the video camera recorder about once per  
month to keep the video camera recorder in an optimum state for a long time.  
Ba t t e ry p a ck  
Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.  
To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into  
contact with the battery terminals.  
Keep the battery pack away from fire.  
Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a car  
parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.  
Keep the battery pack dry.  
Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock.  
Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack.  
Attach the battery pack to the video equipment securely.  
205  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
No t e s o n d ry b a t t e rie s  
To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:  
Be sure to insert the batteries with the + and correctly matching the + and inside  
the battery compartment.  
Dry batteries are not rechargeable.  
Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.  
Do not use different types of batteries.  
Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.  
Do not use leaking batteries.  
If batteries are leaking  
Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.  
If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.  
If the liquid gets into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a  
doctor.  
If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
206  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
Lens  
Carl Zeiss  
Combined power zoom lens  
Filter diameter:  
30 mm (1 3/ 16 in.)  
DV input/output  
4-pin connector  
Headphone jack  
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)  
USB jack  
Vid e o ca m e ra  
re co rd e r  
Syst e m  
10× (Optical), 120× (Digital)  
DCR-TRV16/ TRV18:  
F = 1.7 2.2  
DCR-TRV25/ TRV27:  
F = 1.8 2  
mini-B  
LANC jack  
Stereo mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)  
MIC jack  
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)  
Video recording system  
2 rotary heads  
Helical scanning system  
Audio recording system  
Rotary heads, PCM system  
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,  
stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits  
(Fs 48 kHz, stereo)  
Video signal  
NTSC color, EIA standards  
Usable cassette  
Mini DV cassette with the  
mark printed  
Tape speed  
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/ s  
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/ s  
Recording/playback time  
(using cassette DVM60)  
SP: 1 hour  
Focal length  
DCR-TRV16/ TRV18:  
3.3 33 mm (5/ 32 1 5/ 16 in.)  
When converted to a 35 mm still  
camera  
In CAMERA/ MEMORY (DCR-  
TRV18 only) :  
42 420 mm (1 11/ 16 16 5/ 8 in.)  
DCR-TRV25/ TRV27:  
3.7 37 mm (5/ 32 1 1/ 2 in.)  
When converted to a 35 mm still  
camera  
In CAMERA:  
50 500 mm (2 19 3/ 4 in.)  
In MEMORY:  
42 420 mm (1 11/ 16 16 5/ 8 in.)  
Color temperature  
Auto, HOLD (Hold), nIndoor  
(3 200 K), Outdoor (5 800 K)  
Minimum illumination  
DCR-TRV16/ TRV18:  
5 lx (lux) (F 1.7)  
0 lx (lux) (in the NightShot mode)*  
DCR-TRV25/ TRV27:  
7 lx (lux) (F 1.8)  
0 lx (lux) (in the NightShot mode)*  
* Objects unable to be seen due to  
the dark can be shot with  
infrared lighting.  
LCD scre e n  
Picture  
DCR-TRV16/ TRV18/ TRV25:  
6.2 cm (2.5 type)  
50.3 × 37.4 mm (2 × 1 1/ 2 in.)  
DCR-TRV27:  
8.8 cm (3.5 type)  
72.2 × 50.4 mm (2 7/ 8 × 2 in.)  
Total dot number  
123 200 (560 × 220)  
Ge n e ra l  
Pow er requirements  
7.2 V (battery pack)  
8.4 V (AC power adaptor)  
Average pow er consumption  
(w hen using the battery pack)  
During camera recording using  
LCD  
DCR-TRV16/ TRV18: 3.3 W  
DCR-TRV25: 4.2 W  
DCR-TRV27: 4.6 W  
Viewfinder  
DCR-TRV16/ TRV18: 2.5 W  
DCR-TRV25/ TRV27: 3.4 W  
Operating temperature  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
20°C to + 60°C  
LP: 1.5 hours  
Fastforw ard/rew ind time  
(using cassette DVM60)  
When using the battery pack:  
Approx. 2 min. and 30 seconds  
When using the AC power  
adaptor:  
Approx. 2 min. and 30 seconds  
View finder  
Electric viewfinder (color)  
Image device  
DCR-TRV16:  
4.5 mm (1/ 4 type) CCD (Charge  
Coupled Device)  
Gross: Approx. 680 000 pixels  
Effective :  
Approx. 340 000 pixels  
DCR-TRV18:  
4.5 mm (1/ 4 type) CCD (Charge  
Coupled Device)  
Gross: Approx. 680 000 pixels  
Effective (still):  
Approx. 340 000 pixels  
Effective (moving):  
Approx. 340 000 pixels  
DCR-TRV25/ TRV27:  
3.8 mm (1/ 4.7 type) CCD (Charge  
Coupled Device)  
In p u t /Ou t p u t co n n e ct o rs  
(4°F to + 140°F)  
S video input/output  
4-pin mini DIN  
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
(ohms), unbalanced  
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p,  
75 Ω (ohms)  
Audio/Video input/output  
AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
(ohms), unbalanced, sync negative  
327 mV, (at output impedance  
more than 47 kΩ (kilohms))  
Output impedance with less than  
2.2 kΩ (kilohms)/ Stereo minijack  
(ø 3.5mm)  
Dimensions (Approx.)  
DCR-TRV 16/ TRV18:  
76 × 93 × 162 mm  
(3 × 3 3/ 4 × 6 1/2 in.)  
(w/ h/ d)  
DCR-TRV 25/ TRV27:  
76 × 93 × 163 mm  
(3 × 3 3/ 4 × 6 1/2 in.)  
(w/ h/ d)  
Gross: Approx. 1 070 000  
Effective (still):  
Approx. 1 000 000 pixels  
Effective (moving):  
Input impedance more than  
47 kΩ (kilohms)  
Approx. 690 000 pixels  
207  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
Mass (approx.)  
Ba t t e ry p a ck  
Me m o ry St ick”  
(e xce p t DCR-  
TRV16)  
DCR-TRV16: 610 g (1 lb 5 oz)  
DCR-TRV18: 620 g (1 lb 5 oz)  
DCR-TRV25: 640 g (1 lb 6 oz)  
DCR-TRV27: 660 g (1 lb 7 oz)  
main unit only  
DCR-TRV16: 700 g (1 lb 8 oz)  
DCR-TRV18: 710 g (1 lb 9 oz)  
DCR-TRV25: 740 g (1 lb 10 oz)  
DCR-TRV27: 760 g (1 lb 10 oz)  
including the battery pack,  
cassette DVM60 and lens cap  
Supplied accessories  
DCR-TRV16/TRV18:  
NP-FM30  
Maximum output voltage  
DC 8.4 V  
Output voltage  
DC 7.2 V  
Capacity  
5.0 Wh (700 mAh)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
38.2 × 20.5 × 55.6 mm  
(1 9/ 16 × 13/ 16 × 2 1/ 4 in.)  
(w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
65 g (2.3 oz)  
Type  
Memory  
Flash memory  
8 MB: MSA-8A  
Operating voltage  
2.7 3.6V  
Pow er consumption  
Approx. 45 mA in the operating  
mode  
Approx. 130 µA in the standby  
mode  
Dimensions (approx.)  
50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm  
(2 × 1/ 8 × 7/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
4 g (0.14 oz)  
See page 15.  
AC p o w e r a d a p t o r  
Pow er requirements  
100 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz  
Pow er consumption  
23 W  
Output voltage  
DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the  
operating mode  
Operating temperature  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
20°C to + 60°C (4°F to + 140°F)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
125 × 39 × 62 mm  
(5 × 1 9/ 16 × 2 1/ 2 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
excluding projecting parts  
Mass (approx.)  
Lithium ion  
DCR-TRV25/TRV27:  
Design and specifications are  
subject to change without notice.  
NP-FM50  
Maximum output voltage  
DC 8.4 V  
Output voltage  
DC 7.2 V  
Capacity  
8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
38.2 × 20.5 × 55.6 mm  
(1 9/ 16 × 13/ 16 × 2 1/ 4 in.)  
(w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
76 g (2.7 oz)  
Type  
280 g (9.8 oz)  
excluding power cord  
Lithium ion  
208  
Qu ick Re fe re n ce —  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Ca m co rd e r  
4
5
1
2
3
6
7
1 Focus ring (p. 61)  
2 Lens  
4 View finder (p. 29)  
5 Display w indow (p. 17)  
6 FOCUS/INFINITY button (p. 61)  
7 FADER button (p. 52)  
3 Microphone  
Note on the Carl Zeiss lens  
Your camcorder is equipped with a Carl Zeiss lens which can reproduce fine images.  
The lens for your camcorder was developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in Germany, and  
Sony Corporation. It adopts the MTF* measurement system for video camera and  
offers a quality as the Carl Zeiss lens.  
* MTF stands for Modulation Transfer Function.  
The value number indicates the amount of light of a subject coming into the lens.  
209  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
8
qs  
qd  
9
q;  
qa  
qf  
qg  
qh  
8 PHOTO button (p. 43)  
9 Pow er zoom lever (p. 30)  
q; EDITSEARCH button (p. 37)  
qa Grip strap  
qd SUPER NS/COLOR SLOW S button  
(p. 34)  
qf Jack cover  
qg Camera recording lamp (p. 26, 184)  
qh Remote sensor/Infrared rays emitter  
qs NIGHTSHOT sw itch (p. 34)  
(p. 34, 81)  
Fastening the grip strap  
Fasten the grip strap firmly.  
2
1
3
4
210  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
wa  
ws  
qj  
qk  
ql  
wd  
wf  
w;  
wg  
qj BATT release button (p. 16)  
qk SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 23)  
ql START/STOP button (p. 26)  
w; DC IN jack cover  
wa Intelligent accessory shoe (p. 94)  
ws LOCK sw itch* (p. 26)  
wd POWER sw itch (p. 17)  
wf Access lamp* (p. 106)  
wg Memory Stickslot* (p. 106)  
Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe  
The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video  
light, microphone or printer.*  
The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the  
power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the  
accessory for further information.  
The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory  
securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten  
the screw.  
To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the  
accessory.  
* Except DCR-TRV16  
211  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
wh  
e;  
ea  
es  
wj  
wk  
wl  
ed  
wh  
(LANC) control jack (blue)  
e; (USB) jack  
LANC stands for Local Application  
Control Bus System. The control jack is  
used for controlling the tape transport of  
video equipment and other peripherals  
connected to the video equipment. This  
jack has the same function as the jack  
indicated as CONTROL L.  
ea DV IN/OUT jack (p. 76)  
es i (headphones) jack (green)  
When you use headphones, the speaker  
on your camcorder is silent.  
ed MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) (red)  
Connect an external microphone  
(optional). This jack also accepts a  
plug-in-powermicrophone.  
wj S VIDEO jack (p. 75)  
wk DC IN jack (p. 17)  
wl AUDIO/VIDEO jack (black) (p. 75, 95)  
212  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
el  
r;  
ef  
MEMORY  
PLAY INDEX  
MPEG  
DELETE  
eg  
MEMORY  
MIX  
eh  
ej  
ra  
ek  
STOP  
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
PAUSE  
ef Speaker  
el View finder lens adjustment lever  
(p. 29)  
eg OPEN button (p. 26)  
r; MEMORY operation buttons* (p. 121)  
MPEG u button  
eh LCD screen (p. 26)  
ej RESET button (p. 190)  
MEMORY PLAY button  
MEMORY INDEX button  
MEMORY DELETE button  
MEMORY / + buttons  
ek Video control buttons (p. 40)  
x STOP (stop)  
m REW (rewind)  
MEMORY MIX button  
N PLAY (playback)  
M FF (fastforward)  
X PAUSE (pause)  
ra Hooks for sholder strap  
* Except DCR-TRV16  
Attaching the shoulder strap  
Attach the shoulder strap supplied with your camcorder to the hooks for the shoulder  
strap.  
213  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
rs  
rd  
rj  
rf  
rg  
rk  
rl  
rh  
t;  
rs ENDSEARCH button (p. 37)  
rd DISPLAY button (p. 39)  
rj PB ZOOM button (p. 67, 145)  
rk MENU button (p. 175)  
rf VOLUME buttons (p. 38)  
rl EXPOSURE button (p. 60)  
t; BACK LIGHT button (p. 33)  
rg REC (record) button (p. 89, 91, 93, 143)  
rh AUDIO DUB button (p. 96)  
214  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
ta  
ts  
td  
tg  
th  
tf  
ta Battery pack (p. 16)  
tg Lens cap (p. 26)  
ts  
OPEN/EJECT lever (p. 25)  
th Tripod receptacle  
Make sure that the length of the tripod  
screw is less than 5.5 mm (7/ 32 inch).  
Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod  
securely, and the screw may damage  
your camcorder.  
td Cassette lid  
tf Cassette compartment  
215  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder  
function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.  
6
1
2
3
7
8
9
q;  
4
5
1 PHOTO button (p. 43)  
6 Transmitter  
Point toward the remote sensor to  
control the camcorder after turning on  
the camcorder.  
2 DISPLAY button (p. 39)  
3 SEARCH MODE button (p. 70)  
4 ./> buttons (p. 70)  
5 Tape transport buttons (p. 40)  
7 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 69)  
8 START/STOP button (p. 26)  
9 DATA CODE button (p. 39)  
q; Pow er zoom button (p. 30)  
To p re p a re t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
Insert 2 size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and on the batteries to the + and in  
the battery compartment.  
Notes on the Remote Commander  
Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or  
overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.  
Your camcorder works in the Commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes  
1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid  
erroneous remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the Commander  
mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the Commander mode or covering the sensor  
of the VCR with black paper.  
216  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Op e ra t io n in d ica t o rs  
LCD scre e n a n d vie w fin d e r  
Disp la y w in d o w  
qd  
qf  
qg  
qh  
qj  
qk  
ql  
w;  
wa  
ws  
1
2
3
4
5
120min  
STILL  
16:9WIDE  
NEG. ART  
STBY  
0:12:34  
12min  
6
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
END  
wl  
SEARCH  
AUTO  
60 AWB  
F2.0  
A/VtDV  
16BIT  
100-0001  
wk  
2
7
8
wd  
wf  
wg  
wh  
wj  
9
q;  
qa  
qs  
1 Cassette memory (p. 13, 194)  
qf AE/AF lock indicator (green)*1)  
2 Remaining battery time (p. 32)  
qg STBY/REC (p. 32)/Video control mode/  
Image size*1) (p. 109)/  
3 Zoom (p. 30)/Exposure (p. 60)/Data file  
Image quality mode*1) (p. 107)  
name*1) (p. 105)  
qh NIGHTSHOT (p. 34)/SUPER NIGHTSHOT  
4 Digital effect (p. 55, 66)/MEMORY  
(p. 34)/COLOR SLOW SHUTTER (p. 34)  
MIX*1) (p. 120)/FADER (p. 51)  
qj Warning (p. 192)  
5 16:9WIDE (p. 49)  
qk Tape counter (p. 32)/Time code  
(p. 32)/Self-diagnosis (p. 191)/  
6 Picture effect (p. 54, 65)  
7 Data code (p. 39)  
Tape photo (p. 46)/ Memory photo*1)  
(p. 112)/Image number*1) (p. 138, 142)  
8 Volume (p. 38)/Date (p. 32)/  
ql Remaining tape (p. 32)/Memory  
Time (p. 32)  
playback*1) (p. 138, 142)  
9 PROGRAM AE (p. 58)  
0 Backlight (p. 33)  
w; ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 69)  
wa END SEARCH (p. 37)  
qa SteadyShot off (p. 177)  
qs Manual focus/Infinity (p. 61)  
qd Recording mode (p. 32)  
ws Self-timer*1) (p. 36, 45, 116, 127)  
wd A/V t DV (p. 174)/DV IN (p. 91)  
*
1) Except DCR-TRV16  
217  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
wf Audio mode (p. 182)  
wg Data file name*1) *2) (p. 124)/Time  
(p. 23)  
wh Video flash ready  
This indicator appears when you use the  
video flash light (optional).  
wj Continuous mode*1) (p. 114)  
wk Remaining battery time (p. 17)  
/Tape counter (p. 32)/Memory  
counter*1)/Time code (p. 32)/Self-  
diagnosis (p. 191)  
wl FULL charge (p. 17)  
1)  
*
Except DCR-TRV16  
This indicator appears when the MEMORY MIX functions work.  
2)  
*
218  
In d e x  
A, B  
I, J, K, L  
R
AC power adaptor .................. 17  
Adjusting viewfinder ............. 29  
Audio dubbing ........................ 94  
AUDIO MIX .......................... 178  
Audio mode ........................... 182  
AUTO SHUTTER .................. 176  
BACK LIGHT .......................... 33  
Battery pack ............................. 16  
Beep ........................................ 184  
BOUNCE .................................. 51  
BURST .................................... 114  
i.LINK ..................................... 199  
Image protection ................... 148  
Image quality mode ............. 107  
Image size .............................. 109  
INDEX (Multiple) display ... 139  
InfoLITHIUMbattery ...... 197  
Infrared rays emitter ........ 34, 81  
Insert editing ........................... 92  
Intelligent accessory shoe .... 211  
Interval recording ................... 62  
JPEG ........................................ 105  
Labeling a cassette ................ 103  
LANC jack ............................. 212  
Luminance key ........................ 55  
Rec review ............................... 37  
Recording time ........................ 19  
Remaining battery time  
indicator ................................ 32  
Remaining tape indicator ...... 32  
Remote commander ............. 216  
Remote sensor ....................... 210  
RESET ..................................... 190  
S
Self-diagnosis display .......... 191  
Self-timer recording  
C, D  
.......................... 36, 45, 116, 127  
Shoulder strap ....................... 213  
Signal convert function ........ 174  
Skip scan .................................. 40  
Slide show .............................. 147  
Slow playback ......................... 40  
SLOW SHUTTER .................... 55  
STEADYSHOT ...................... 177  
Stereo tape ............................. 195  
STILL ........................................ 55  
Sub sound .............................. 195  
SUPER NIGHTSHOT ............. 34  
Camera chroma key ............. 120  
Cassette memory ............ 13, 194  
Charging battery ..................... 17  
Charging built-in  
rechargeable battery .......... 203  
Clock set ................................... 23  
Color slow shutter .................. 34  
Continuous ............................ 114  
Data code ................................. 39  
Date search .............................. 71  
DEMO ..................................... 183  
DIGITAL EFFECT ............ 55, 66  
Digital program editing  
M, N  
Main sound ............................ 195  
Manual focus ........................... 61  
Memory chroma key ............ 120  
Memory luminance key ....... 120  
MEMORY MIX ...................... 120  
Memory PB ZOOM .............. 145  
Memory Photo recording .... 112  
Memory Stick.................... 105  
Menu settings ........................ 175  
Memory overlap ................... 120  
M.FADER ................................. 51  
Mirror mode ............................ 31  
Moisture condensation ........ 202  
MONOTONE .......................... 51  
MPEG ..................................... 105  
MPEG movie recording ....... 125  
MULTI SCRN ........................ 114  
NIGHTSHOT .......................... 34  
NORMAL .............................. 114  
Normal charge ........................ 17  
NTSC system ......................... 201  
T, U, V  
........................................ 78, 132  
Digital zoom ............................ 30  
DISPLAY .................................. 39  
DOT .......................................... 51  
Dual sound track tape .......... 195  
Tape counter ............................ 32  
Tape PB ZOOM ....................... 67  
Tape Photo recording ............. 46  
Telephoto ................................. 30  
Time code ................................. 32  
Title ........................................... 98  
Title search ............................... 70  
TRAIL ....................................... 55  
Transition ................................. 27  
TV color systems ................... 201  
USB jack ................................. 212  
USB Streaming ...................... 157  
E
EDITSEARCH ......................... 37  
END SEARCH ................... 37, 41  
EXP BRKTG ........................... 114  
Exposure .................................. 60  
O, P, Q  
F, G, H  
OLD MOVIE ............................ 55  
Operation indicators ............ 217  
OVERLAP ................................ 51  
Photo save .............................. 135  
Photo scan ................................ 73  
Photo search ............................ 73  
PICTURE EFFECT ............ 54, 65  
Picture search .......................... 40  
Playback pause ........................ 40  
Playback time .......................... 20  
Power zoom ............................. 30  
Print mark .............................. 151  
PROGRAM AE........................ 58  
W, X, Y, Z  
FADER ..................................... 51  
Fade in/ out .............................. 51  
Flash motion ............................ 55  
FOCUS/ INFINITY ................. 61  
Format .................................... 180  
Frame recording ...................... 64  
Full charge ............................... 17  
Grip strap ............................... 210  
Headphone jack .................... 212  
Heads ...................................... 203  
HiFi SOUND ......................... 178  
Warning indicators ............... 192  
White balance .......................... 48  
Wide-angle .............................. 30  
Wide mode .............................. 49  
WIPE ......................................... 51  
WORLD TIME ....................... 184  
Write-protect tab ............. 25, 105  
Zero set memory ............... 69, 92  
Zoom ........................................ 30  
219  
Printed on recycled paper.  
Printed using VOC (Volatile Organic  
Compound)-free vegetable oil based ink.  
Sony Corporation Printed in Japan  

Windmere WHB200C User Manual
Weil McLain Standing Pilot Cast Iron Gas Boiler CGA25SPDN User Manual
Weil McLain SERIES 2 LGB 11 User Manual
Sony TC TX313 User Manual
Sony SAL1870 User Manual
Samsung SL870 User Manual
Samsung Cable Box SRD 470 User Manual
Samsung Blu ray Disc Player BD D5250C User Manual
Samsung Bluetooth Headset GT B7510 User Manual
Samsung 100705 User Manual